Samsung TracFone SCH S968C Galaxy S III (7.1 MB) TF English User Manual MG3 F5

User Manual: Samsung (7.1 MB) Samsung Galaxy S3 SCH-S968C User Manual | Manual Device

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 474 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Samsung Galaxy S III

GH68-39270B Print 1.1 Printed in Korea

MOBILE PHONE

User Manual

Please read this manual before operating your

phone and keep it for future reference.

TF_S968C_UM_English_MG3_121613_F5

Warning!

This product contains chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and reproductive toxicity.

Intellectual Property

All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is

otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers

relating to the SAMSUNG Phone, including but not limited to,

accessories, parts, or software relating there to (the “Phone

System”), is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal

laws, state laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual

Property includes, but is not limited to, inventions (patentable or

unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software,

computer programs, and related documentation and other works of

authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the rights

secured by the Intellectual Property. Moreover, you agree that you

will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare derivative works of,

reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to

create source code from the software. No title to or ownership in the

Intellectual Property is transferred to you. All applicable rights of the

Intellectual Property shall remain with SAMSUNG and its suppliers.

Open Source Software

Some software components of this product incorporate source code

covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser

General Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and

other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered under

the open source licenses, please visit:

http://opensource.samsung.com

Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of

Liability

EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON

THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE

PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES

NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER

WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO

THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY

PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR

QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT;

THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS

CONTAINED THEREIN; OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE

REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT

PERTAINING THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION

MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO

THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR

ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR

USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE

EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR

BENEFITS.

Modification of Software

SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR

INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY

SETTINGS, OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM

SOFTWARE.

USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR

DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY. YOUR CARRIER

MAY NOT PERMIT USERS TO DOWNLOAD CERTAIN SOFTWARE,

SUCH AS CUSTOM OS.

SAFE™ (Samsung Approved For Enterprise)

SAFE™: "SAFE™" (Samsung for Enterprise) is a mark for a

Samsung device which has been tested against Samsung's own

internal criteria for interoperability with certain third party

security-related solutions for MDM and VPN. The testing includes

field testing with local network connection and menu tree testing

which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the

Samsung device. During the testing, the device is tested with the

security solutions to see if the solutions work with the device as

described by the third party security solution providers. The testing,

for example, includes field testing with local network connection and

menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in

conjunction with the Samsung device. For more information about

Samsung's SAFE™ program, please refer to

www.samsung.com/us/

safe

Disclaimer of Warranties: EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN

THEIR STANDARD END USER LICENSE AND WARRANTY, TO THE FULL

EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD.,

SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC, AND THEIR

AFFILIATES (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE

"SAMSUNG ENTITIES") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL

WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,

INTEROPERABILITY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH RESPECT TO

INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™

DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF

ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION

TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™ DEVICES OR

APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. In addition,

information technology security protection will be affected by

features or functionality associated with, among other things the e-

mail platform, master data management, and virtual private network

solutions selected by the software provider, solution provider or user.

Choice of an e-mail, master data management, and virtual private

network solution is at the sole discretion of the software provider,

solution provider or user and any associated effect on information

technology security protection is solely the responsibility of the

software provider, solution provider or user. For complete statement

of limited warranty, please refer to

www.samsung.com/us/safe

available on the web and where Samsung smartphone and Galaxy

Tab™ devices are sold. [101212]

Samsung Telecommunications America

(STA), LLC

Headquarters:

1301 E. Lookout Drive

Richardson, TX 75082

registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.

Do you have questions about your Samsung Device?

For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS

System (Automated Response System) at:

www.samsung.com/us/support

The actual available capacity of the internal memory is less than the

specified capacity because the operating system and default

applications occupy part of the memory. The available capacity may

change when you upgrade the device.

Nuance®, VSuite™, T9® Text Input, and the Nuance logo are

trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications,

Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.

ACCESS® and NetFront™ are trademarks or registered trademarks

of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and other countries.

The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and

combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are

registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.

Customer Care Center:

1000 Klein Rd.

Plano, TX 75074

Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)

Internet Address:

http://www.samsung.com

microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card

Association.

Openwave® is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.

Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play,

Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Music, Google Talk,

Hangouts, Picasa, YouTube and other marks are trademarks of

Google Inc.

Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.

, DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are

trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used

under license.

DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including

premium content.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,

LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX

Certified® device that has passed rigorous testing to verify that it

plays DivX video. Visit

www.divx.com

for more information and

software tools to convert your files into DivX videos.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must

be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand

(VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD

section in your device setup menu (tap

Apps > Settings > About

device > Legal information > License settings > DivX® VOD >

). Go to

vod.divx.com

for more information on how to

complete your registration.

Table of Contents

Section 1: Getting Started ....................................................8

Understanding this User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Battery Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Extending Your Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Initial Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Switching the Device On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Restarting the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Locking and Unlocking the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Creating a New Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Signing into Your Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Retrieving your Google Account Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Confirming the Default Image and Video Storage Location . . . . . . 24

Creating a Samsung Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Google Now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Section 2: Understanding Your Device ..............................31

Features of Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Side Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Device Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Screen Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Using Gestures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Using the Multi Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Customizing the Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Section 3: Call Functions and Contacts List ......................79

Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Making a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Ending a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Making Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Answering a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Managing Reject Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

International Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Pause Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Wait Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Redialing the Last Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Using S Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

In Call Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Logs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Section 4: Entering Text ...................................................104

Text Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Selecting the Text Input Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Entering Text Using Swype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Using the Samsung Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Using the Google Voice Typing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Section 5: Contacts ..........................................................119

Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Contacts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Finding a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Contact List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Contact Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Contact Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Joining Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Sending a Namecard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Copying Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Synchronizing Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Adding more Contacts via Accounts and Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Additional Contact Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

The Favorites Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Section 6: Messages ........................................................150

Types of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Creating and Sending Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Viewing Newly Received Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Deleting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Message Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Messaging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Text Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Using Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Using Google Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Hangouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Google + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Section 7: Multimedia ......................................................185

Assigning the Default Storage Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Using the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Camera Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Sharing Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Using the Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

The Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Using the Video Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Play Movies & TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Play Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Using Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Creating a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Transferring Music Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Removing Music Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Samsung Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

AllShare Cast Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Section 8: Applications and Development .......................248

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Google . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Google Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Google + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Group Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Hangouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

My Account Downloader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

My Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Play Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Play Magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Play Movies & TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Play Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Play Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Downloading a New Google Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Launching an Installed Google Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

S Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

S Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Samsung Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Video Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Voice Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Voice Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

VPN Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Section 9: Connections .....................................................293

Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Enable Downloading for Web Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

PC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Section 10: Changing Your Settings ................................321

Accessing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Wi-Fi Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Data Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

More Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Home Screen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

SD Card & Device Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Power Saving Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Battery Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Application Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Location Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Lock Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Language and Input Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Back up and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Add Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Motion Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Accessibility Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Developer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

About Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

System Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Section 11: Health and Safety Information ......................400

Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information . . . . . . . 407

FCC Part 15 Information to User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Smart Practices While Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Battery Use and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

UL Certified Travel Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Display / Touch-Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

GPS & AGPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Responsible Listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) Regulations for

Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Restricting Children's Access to Your Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . 431

FCC Notice and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Other Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

End User License Agreement for Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Index ..................................................................................444

Section 1: Getting Started

This section explains how to get started with your phone by installing

and charging the battery, installing the micro SIM card and optional

memory card, and setting up your voicemail.

Before using your device for the first time, you’ll need to install and

charge the battery and install the micro SIM card.

The micro SIM card is loaded with your subscription details, such as

your PIN, available optional services, and many other features. If

desired, you can also install an SD card to store media for use with

your phone.

Important!

microSIM card support is dependant on your service

provider.

Understanding this User Manual

The sections of this manual generally follow the features of your

phone.

Also included is important safety information that you should know

before using your phone. This information is available near the back

of the online user manual.

This manual provides navigation instructions according to the default

display settings. If you select other settings, navigation may be

different.

Unless otherwise specified, all instructions in this manual assume

you are starting from the Home screen and using the available keys.

Getting Started 9

Note:

Instructions in this manual are based on default settings, and

may vary from your device, depending on the software version

on your device, and any changes to the device’s Settings.

Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual start

with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.

All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual displays

may vary, depending on the software version of your device and

any changes to the device’s Settings.

Special Text

Throughout this manual, you’ll find text that is set apart from the

rest. These are intended to point out important information, share

quick methods for activating features, to define terms, and more.

The definitions for these methods are as follows:

•

Notes

: Presents alternative options for the current feature, menu, or sub-

menu.

•

Tips

: Provides quick or innovative methods, or useful shortcuts.

•

Important

: Points out important information about the current feature that

could affect performance.

•

Warning

: Brings to your attention important information to prevent loss of

data or functionality, or even prevent damage to your phone.

Text Conventions

This manual provides condensed information about how to use your

phone. To make this possible, the following text conventions are

used to represent often-used steps:

Example:

From the Home screen, press (

)

➔

Settings

➔

Bluetooth

Battery Cover

The battery, micro SIM card and SD card are installed under the

battery cover.

Important!

Before removing or replacing the battery cover, make sure

the device is switched off. To turn the device off, hold

down the key until the power-off image displays,

then tap

Power off

Caution!

Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively during

installation or removal. Doing so may damage the cover.

➔

Arrows are used to represent the sequence of

selecting successive options in longer, or

repetitive, procedures.

Getting Started 11

To remove the battery cover:

1. Hold the device firmly and locate the cover release latch.

2. Place your fingernail in the opening and firmly “pop” the cover

off the device (similar to a soda can).

To replace the battery cover:



Position the battery cover over the battery compartment and

press down until you hear a click.

Release Latch

Installing the microSD Memory Card

Your device supports an optional (external) microSD™ memory

cards for storage of media such as music, pictures, video and other

files. The SD card is designed for use with this mobile device and

other devices.

Note:

microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 4GB.

microSDHC™ memory card types can range from 4GB to up to

32GB. microSDXC™ memory card types can include capacities

greater than 32GB.

Note:

This device supports a memory card of up to a 64GB.

1. Remove the battery cover.

2. Locate the microSD card slot on the inside of the device.

3. Orient the card with the gold strips facing down.

4. Carefully slide the microSD card into the card socket until it

clicks into place.

Important!

Be sure to align the gold contact pins on the card with the

phone’s contact pins.

Getting Started 13

Removing the microSD Memory Card

1. Remove the battery cover.

2. Firmly press the card into the slot and release it. The card

should pop partially out of the slot.

3. Remove the card from the slot.

4. Replace the battery cover.

Battery

Before using your device for the first time, install the battery and

charge it fully.

Important!

Before removing or replacing the battery, make sure the

device is switched off. To turn the device off, hold down

the key until the power-off image displays, then

tap

Power off

SIM Card

Correct

Incorrect

Installing the Battery

1. Slide the battery into the compartment (1) so that the tabs on

the end align with the slots at the bottom of the phone, making

sure the connectors align.

2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).

Removing the Battery



Grip the battery at the top end (3) and lift it up and out of the

battery compartment (4).

SIM Card

Installing Battery

Removing Battery

Getting Started 15

Charging the Battery

Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. A wall

charger, which is used for charging the battery, is included with your

device. Use only approved batteries and chargers. Ask your local

Samsung dealer for further details.

Before using your device for the first time, you must fully charge the

battery. A discharged battery recharges fully in approximately 4

hours.

Note:

Verify that the battery is installed prior to connecting the wall

charger. If both the wall charger is connected and the battery is

not installed, the handset will power cycle continuously and

prevent proper operation. Failure to unplug the wall charger

before you remove the battery, can cause the device to become

damaged.

Correct

Incorrect

Charging Head

USB Cable

Important!

It is recommended you fully charge the battery before

using your device for the first time.

1. Connect the USB cable to the charging head.

2. Locate the Charger/Accessory jack.

3. Insert the USB cable into the device’s Charger/Accessory jack.

4. Plug the charging head into a standard AC power outlet. The

device turns on with the screen locked and indicates both its

charge state and percent of charge.

Warning!

While the device is charging, if the touch screen does not

function due to an unstable power supply unplug the USB

power adapter from the power outlet or unplug the USB

cable from the device.

Correct

Incorrect

Getting Started 17

Note:

This illustration displays both the

correct

and incorrect

orientation for connecting the charger. If the charger is

incorrectly connected, damage to the accessory port will occur

therefore voiding the phone’s warranty.

5. When charging is finished, first unplug the charger’s power

plug from the AC wall outlet, then disconnect the charger’s

connector from the phone.

Important!

If your handset has a touch screen display, please note that

a touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad

of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive

force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch

screen may damage the tempered glass surface and void

the warranty.

Low Battery Indicator

When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of talk time

remain (~15% charge), a warning tone sounds and the

“Battery low” message repeats at regular intervals on the display. In

this condition, your device conserves its remaining battery power, by

dimming the backlight.

When the battery level becomes too low, the device automatically

turns off.

The on-screen battery charge is represented (by default) as a

colored battery icon. You can also choose to display a percentage

value. Having a percentage value on-screen can provide a better

idea of the remaining charge on the battery.



From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

➔

Display

➔

Display battery percentage

For more information, refer to “Display Settings” on page 351.

Extending Your Battery Life

Active applications, light levels, Bluetooth usage, and GPS

functionality all act to drain your battery. The following is a list of

helpful tips that can help conserve your battery power:

•

Reduce your backlight on time.

•

Turn Bluetooth off when not in use.

•

Turn Wi-Fi off when not in use.

•

Deactivate the GPS when not needed. Most applications using this

function will periodically query the GPS satellites for your current location;

each query drains your battery.

•

Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted before charging your

device. Repeating this process of a complete discharge and recharge can

over time reduce the storage capacity of any battery.

•

Turn off Automatic application sync.

•

Use the Power Saving feature to deactivate some hardware and interface

functions.

•

Check the Battery use screen to review what features or functions have

been consuming your battery resources.

•

Check the Running Services and close any unnecessary applications.

Getting Started 19

•

Use the Task Manager feature to end/shutdown background applications

that are still running. These minimized applications can, over time, cause

your device to “slow down”.

•

Turn off any streaming services after use (see Running Services).

•

Animated wallpapers use processing power, memory, and more power.

Change your Live Wallpaper to a non-animated Wallpaper gallery or

Gallery image.

Initial Device Configuration

1. Select a language from the associated field. English is the

default language.

2. Tap

Start

3. At the

Activate your phone

screen, tap

Activate

to initiate the

activation process.

Note:

You may be prompted with a notification that your activation is

completed.

4. At the

Activate mobile data servcie

screen, tap

Activate

initiate the data activation process.

5. If prompted, connect to an active Wi-Fi Access point.

6. At the

Got Google?

screen, choose either

Yes

to log into your

existing Google account or

to continue.

•

If you selected

Yes

, on the Sign in screen, enter your current Google

Email and Password information and tap ( )

•

Tap

to agree to the Google legal agreements.

•

If prompted to enable purchases, tap

Set up credit card

and enter your

credit card information and click

Save

•

Click

Skip

to continue without entering this information.

7. If you indicated that you did not have a current Google

account, then at the

Make it Google

screen, choose either

Get

an account

to create a new account or

Not now

to continue.

8. Select/deselect the desired Google location services and tap

(

Note:

Enabling Google location services can drain battery power.

9. If prompted, enter a

First

and

Last

name then tap (

This will help to identify this as your device.

10. Read the on-screen Google services disclaimer and then tap

(

). This will help to identify this as your device.

11. Tap

Finish

to complete the setup process.

12. Go through the on-screen tutorial.

Getting Started 21

Switching the Device On or Off

Once the device has been configured, you will not be prompted with

setup screens again.

To turn the device on:



Press and hold (

Power/End

) until the device switches

on.

The device searches for your network and after finding it, you

can make or receive calls.

Note:

The display language is preset to English at the factory. To

change the language, use the Language menu. For more

information, refer to “Language and Input Settings” on

page 373.

To turn the device off:

1. Press and hold (

Power/End

) until the Device options

screen appears.

2. Tap

Power off

() ➔

Restarting the Device

1. Press and hold (

Power/End

) until the Device options

screen appears.

2. Tap

Restart

() ➔

Locking and Unlocking the Device

By default, the device screen locks when the backlight turns off.



Place your finger on the screen and swipe the glass in any of

the directions shown unlock the device.

Note:

You can choose to configure lock settings to prevent

unauthorized use of your device. For more information, refer to

“Security” on page 371.

Creating a New Google Account

You should create a Google™ account when you first use your

device in order to fully utilize available functionality. This account

provides access to several device features such as Gmail™,

Google+™, Hangouts™, and Google Play™ Store applications.

Before you can access Google applications, you must enter your

account information. These applications sync between your device

and your online Google account.

To create a new Google Account from your device:

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Play Store

2. Read the introduction and tap

New

to begin.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to create a Google Account.

– or –

If this is not the first time you are starting the device,

tap ➔ (

Gmail

Note:

If you already have a Google account, you only need to sign in.

Getting Started 23

Signing into Your Google Account

1. Launch an application that requires a Google account (such as

Play Store or Gmail).

2. Click

Existing

3. Tap the

and

Password

fields and enter your information.

Choose to enable/disable the option to keep yourslef up to date

with news and offers, then tap

4. Tap (

). Your device communicates with the Google

servers to confirm your information.

5. From the Backup and restore screen, you can enable the

option to stay up to date on news and offers, then tap

(

Retrieving your Google Account Password

A Google account password is required for Google applications. If

you misplace or forget your Google Account password, follow these

instructions to retrieve it:

1. From your computer, use an Internet browser and navigate to

http://google.com/accounts.

2. Click on the

Can’t access your account?

link.

3. Follow the on-screen password recovery procedure.

Confirming the Default Image and Video

Storage Location

Although the device is configured to store new pictures and videos to

the Memory card, it is a very good idea to confirm this location

before using your device.

Important!

Too many users can overlook this storage destination until

something goes wrong. It is recommended that you verify

this location or change it before initiating the use of the

camera or camcorder features.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Camera

2. From the viewfinder screen, tap (

Settings

) and scroll up

to the Storage entry.

3. Tap this entry and select the desired default storage location

for newly taken pictures or videos. Choose from:

Phone

Memory card

Note:

It is recommended that you set the option to

Memory card

4. Press to return to the Home screen.

Getting Started 25

Creating a Samsung Account

Just as important as setting up and activating a Google account to

help provide access to Play Store, etc.. An active Samsung account

is required to begin accessing applications such as Media Hub.

Note:

The Samsung account application will manage your access to

the previously mentioned applications, and there is no longer a

need to remember different passwords for each application.

1. In a single motion, touch and drag the Status bar down to the

bottom of the screen to reveal the Notifications panel and tap

(

Samsung account

– or –

Press ➔ and then tap

Settings

➔

Add account

➔

Samsung account

2. If you have previously created a Samsung account, tap

– or –

If this is your first time, tap

Create new account

3. Enter your the required information and tap

4. Tap

Terms and conditions

and

to read the legal

disclaimers and related information.

5. If you agree to the terms, place a green check mark in the

accept all the terms above

field and tap

Agree

6. Enter your the required information and tap

Note:

You may be prompted to confirm your credentials via email.

7. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to verify your

account via the provided email address.

Note:

Without confirming your email address and following the

documented procedures, related applications will not function

properly since it is Samsung account that is managing their

username and password access.

Voicemail

Setting Up Your Voicemail

Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls to

voicemail, even if your device is in use or turned off. As soon as your

battery is charged, activate your voicemail account.

Important!

Always use a password to protect against unauthorized

access.

For new users, follow the instructions below to set up voicemail:

Note:

Voicemail setup may be different depending on your network.

1. From the Home screen, tap and then touch and hold the

key until the device dials voicemail.

You may be prompted to enter a password.

2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, a greeting, and a

display name.

Getting Started 27

Accessing Your Voicemail

You can access your Voicemail by either pressing and holding

on the keypad, or by using the phone’s Application icon, then tapping

the Voicemail application. To access Voicemail using the menu:

1. From the Home screen, tap and then touch and hold

until the device dials voicemail.

Note:

Touching and holding will launch Visual voicemail if it is

already active on your device.

2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the voicemail

center.

Accessing Your Voicemail From Another Phone

1. Dial your wireless phone number.

2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the asterisk key

on the phone you are using.

3. Enter your passcode.

Task Manager

Your device can run applications simultaneously, with some

applications running in the background.

Sometimes your device might seem to slow down over time, and the

biggest reason for this are background applications. These are

applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and are still

active but minimized. The Task Manager not only lets you see which

of these applications are still active in the background but also easily

lets you choose which applications are left running and which are

closed.

Note:

The larger the number of applications running on your phone,

the larger the energy drain on your battery.

Task Manger Overview



Press and hold (

Home

) and then tap

(

Task manager

). This screen contains the following tabs:

• Active applications

display those currently active applications running

on your phone.

•Downloaded

displays any installed packages or applications from the

Play Store that are taking up memory space. Tap

Uninstall

to remove

them from your phone.

• RAM

, which displays the amount of current RAM (Random Access

Memory) currently being used and allow you to

Clear Memory

•Storage

displays a visual graph indicating the available and used space

within the System storage and external SD card.

Getting Started 29

•Help

provides additional battery saving and RAM management

techniques.

Shutting Down a Currently Active Application

1. Press and hold (

Home

) and then tap

(

Task manager

2. From the

Active applications

tab, tap

End

to close selected

applications.

– or –

Tap

End all

to close all background running applications.

Google Now

Google Now® recognizes a users’ repeated actions performed on the

device (including access of common locations, repeated calendar

appointments, search queries, etc.). This information is then used to

display more relevant information to the user in the form of “cards”.

These scrollable on-screen cards are displayed when the Google

Now application is launched.

These cards are not manually added.

The service uses your GPS, Google Search, and usage information to

generate these cards automatically.

To initially set up Google Now:

1. Press and hold (

Home

) and then tap (

Google Now

2. Follow the on-screen instructions to review the available

information.

3. When prompted, agree to launch the application. Some initial

on-screen “cards” are shown. A default is the Weather card

that provides updated weather information in your area.

To configure the Google Now settings:

1. Press and hold (

Home

) and then tap (

Google Now

2. Press and select

Settings

3. Access each desired Settings page and configure it as desired.

When these condition are met, new card information will begin to

appear in the Google Now list of cards.

Understanding Your Device 31

Section 2: Understanding Your Device

This section outlines key features of your device. It also describes

the device’s keys, screen and the icons that display when the device

is in use.

Features of Your Device

Your device is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many significant

features. The following list outlines a few of the features included in

your device.

•

Touch screen with virtual (on-screen) QWERTY keyboard

•

Delivering data speeds faster than the current 3G network technology.

Note:

4G network connection is dependent on your service provider.

•

4.8” HD Super AMOLED

screen (1280x720)

•

Android 4.1.2, Jelly Bean Platform

•

Smart Switch™ compliant. For more information, see

www.samsungsmartswitch.com

•

Support for Gestures (Screen Shot, Quick pause, Quick Rotate, Tap to Top

of List, Missed Event Alert, and Camera Quick Access)

•

Wi-Fi

Capability

•

Apps available to download from the Google Play™ Store

•

AllShare

Play to share your media content across DLNA certified device.

AllShare Cloud connectivity enabled via the use of an external Web storage

service

•

Group Play

screen sharing

•

Compliant with AllShare Cast Hub

•

8 Megapixel Camera and Camcorder with autofocus and digital zoom

•

1.9 Megapixel Front Facing camera for Video Chat

•

S-Beam and Android Beam file transfer technology

•

Share Shot camera sharing-capable via multi-connect Wi-Fi Direct

connection

•

Bluetooth enabled

•

NFC-compatible

•

Full Integration of Google Mobile™ Services (Gmail, YouTube, Google

Maps, Google Voice Search)

•

Multiple Messaging Options: Text/Picture/Video Messaging, and Instant

Messaging with Windows Live Messenger, Hangouts™ and Yahoo!

Messenger

•

Corporate and Personal Email

•

Music Player with multitasking features

•

Pre-loaded e-reader applications such as: Play Books™

•

Assisted GPS (Google Navigation)

•

Webkit-based browser

•

Reader Mode can transform content-rich Web sites into easier to read

pages. Located within the browser, this feature allows users to convert

existing Web pages into a more accessibly readable source

•

Expandable memory slot - supports up to 64GB microSD

•

Video Chat via Hangouts

•

Google Play™ Music

•

Compatibility with a new micro SIM card

Understanding Your Device 33

•

Wi-Fi Calling via the use of a micro SIM card

•

Access to thousands of Movies and TV Shows with the Samsung Media

Hub

•

HD Video Player 1080p

– Codec: MPEG4, H.264, H.263, VC-1, WMV7/8, VP8, MP4/3GP

– Format: 3GP (MP4), WMV (ASF), AVI, and DivX

•

Video Player support for PIP (Picture in Picture) viewing

•

DivX Certified

to play DivX

video up to HD 720p, including premium

content

•

Kies Air to wirelessly sync your PC with your phone via a Wi-Fi

connection

•

Contextual tags available within the Camera application

•

Multi-WIndow functionality

•

Pop-up Play (Picture in Picture) functionality available via the video player

•

Starter mode functionality converts the current User Interface into larger

and easier to use format

Front View

The following illustrations show the main elements of your device.

The following list correlates to the illustrations.

Headset jack

allows you to connect a hands-free headset so

you can listen to music.

Indicator light

illuminates with a series of distinct colors and

flashing patterns to indicate different notifications and

statuses. Events include Charging, Low battery, and Missed

event:

•

Powering on -

blue

blinks/animates

•

Battery Charging -

red

remains on

•

Battery Fully Charged -

green

remains on.

•

Low Battery or Charging Error-

red

blinks/animates

•

Missed Notification (Call or Messaging) -

blue

blinks/animates

For more information, refer to “LED Indicator” on page 353.

Menu key

displays a list of options available for the current

screen. From the Home screen it displays Add apps and

widgets, Create folder, Set wallpaper, Edit page, Search, and

Settings options.

Home

key displays the Home screen when pressed. Press and

hold to display your recent apps, Task manager, and Remove

all option.

Double-press to activate S Voice.

Understanding Your Device 35

USB Power/Accessory connector

allows you to connect a power

cable or optional accessories such as a USB/data cable.

Microphone

is used during phone calls and allows other callers

to hear you clearly when you are speaking to them. There are

two microphones on the device:

•

Bottom microphone: used during handset mode.

5 6

•

Top microphone: used while an active call is in the speakerphone mode

and assists in noise cancellation (2 microphone solution).

Back key

redisplays the previous screen or clears entries.

Display

shows all the information needed to operate your

phone, such as the connection status, received signal

strength, phone battery level, and time.

Front Facing Camera

allows you to take pictures while facing

the screen and allows you to video conference.

10.

Proximity Sensor

detects how close an object is to the surface

of the screen. This is typically used to detect when your face is

pressed up against the screen, such as during a phone call.

•

While talking on the phone, the sensor detects talk activity and locks the

keypad to prevent accidental key presses.

11.

Light Sensor

lets you use the ambient light level to adjust the

screen brightness/contrast. This sensor decreases screen

brightness in dim light.

•

In a bright light condition (outdoors), the sensors cause the device to

increase the brightness and contrast for better viewing.

•

In dim light conditions, the device decreases the screen brightness to

compensate.

12.

Receiver

allows you to hear the other caller and the different

ring tones or sounds offered by your phone.

Understanding Your Device 37

Back View

The following illustration shows the external elements of your

Device:

microSD Card Slot

(internal) allows you use a microSD card to

expand the memory of your device.

micro SIM Card Slot

(internal) Installation location for SIM card.

External speaker

allows you to hear ringers, music, and other

sounds offered by your phone.

Camera lens

is used to take photos.

Flash

is used to take photos in low-light conditions.

2 3

1 5

Side Views

The following illustration shows the side elements of your device:

Volume key

allows you to adjust the ringer volume in standby

mode (with the phone open) or adjust the voice volume during

a call. When receiving an incoming call:

•

Pressing the volume key down mutes the ring tone.

Power/End key

ends a call or switches the phone off

and on. Press and hold for two seconds to turn toggle the

Silent mode or Airplane mode states, turn the device on or off,

or Restart.

Understanding Your Device 39

Device Display

Your display provides information about the device’s status, and is

the interface to manage features. The display indicates your

connection status, signal strength, battery status and time. Icons

display at the top of the device when an incoming call or message is

received and also alerts you at a specified time when an alarm was

set. The screen also displays notifications, and Application (or

shortcut) bar with five primary shortcuts: Phone, Contacts,

Messaging, Internet, and Apps.

Display settings

In this menu, you can change various settings for the for the

wallpaper, cube, brightness or backlight.



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

) ➔

(

Settings

) ➔

Display

. For more information, refer to “Display Settings” on

page 351.

Status Bar

The Status Bar shows information about the connection status,

signal strength, phone battery level, and time, and displays

notifications about incoming messages, calls and other actions.

This list identifies the icons you see on your phone’s display screen:

Indicator Icons

This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your device’s display and

Indicator area:

Note:

Some Notification icons can be hidden manually by toggling the

status of the Notification panel function. For more information,

refer to “Accessing Additional Screen Functions” on page 48.

Displays your current signal strength. The greater the

number of bars, the stronger the signal.

Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active. You cannot send

or receive any calls or access online information.

Indicates there is no signal available.

Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.

Displays when a call is in progress. Icon is displayed in the

Status bar area.

Displays when a call is on hold. Icon is displayed in the

Status bar area.

Displays when an active call is routed through a Bluetooth

headset. Icon is displayed in the Status bar area.

Displays when you have missed an incoming call.

Understanding Your Device 41

Displays when you device is set to automatically

reject calls from your Reject list or all calls.

Displays when the speakerphone is on. Icon is displayed

in the Status bar area.

Displays when the microphone is muted. Icon is displayed

in the Status bar area.

Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always forward.

Displayed in the Status bar when the current call is

minimized. For more information, refer to “Configuring

Additional Voice Call Settings” on page 343.

Displays your current battery charge level. Icon shown

is fully charged.

Displays when the current battery is 100 percent

charged and the Display battery percentage option is

enabled within the

Settings

➔

Display

menu.

Displays your battery is currently charging.

Displays your current battery charge level is low

(Charge: ~28% - 15%).

Displays your current battery charge level is very low

(Charge: ~15% - 5%).

Shows your current battery only has up to 4% power

remaining and will soon shutdown. (Charge: ~4% - 1%).

Displays when connected to the 1X network.

100%

1X1X

Displays when your phone is communicating with

the 1X network.

Displays when connected to the 3G network. 3G indicator

is only seen when roaming.

Displays when your phone is communicating with

the 3G network. 3G indicator is only seen when roaming.

Displays when the phone has detected an active USB

connection and is in a USB Debugging mode.

Displays when there is a new text message.

Displays when an outgoing text message has failed to

be delivered.

Displays when there is a new voicemail message.

Displays in the notifications window when there is

a new Email message.

Displays in the notifications window when there is

a new Gmail message.

Displays when a new Google+ notification has

been received.

Displays when the time and date for a Calendar Event has

arrived. For more information, refer to “Calendar” on

page 250.

1X1X

Understanding Your Device 43

Displays when an alarm is set.

For more information, refer to “Setting an Alarm” on

page 254.

Displays when the device is in Silent mode.

All sounds except media and alarms are silenced, and

Silent mode is set to

Vibrate

. For more information, refer to

“Silent mode via Device Options Screen” on page 347.

Displays when the device is in Silent mode.

All sounds are silenced, and Silent mode is set to

Mute

Displays when data synchronization and application

sync is active and synchronization is in progress for

Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.

Displays when the Blocking mode feature is active.

Displays when Bluetooth technology is active

and enabled.

Displays when the Bluetooth technology is active

and communicating with an external device.

Displays when the an outbound file transfer is

in progress.

Displays when a file or application download is

in progress.

Displays when a file is being uploaded or sync’d between

your device and an external Web storage location.

Displays when the uploaded or transferred file was

successfully delivered.

Displays when the Share shot option is enabled from within

the Camera Shooting mode menu and images and being

shared via Wi-Fi Direct.

Displays when a screen capture has been taken and stored

in the clipboard.

For more information, refer to “Using Gestures” on

page 58.

Displays when your device is connected being

used to control streaming media and is connected to a

Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA)

certified device using the Samsung Link application.

Displays when your device is currently sharing/streaming

media to paired device using the Samsung Link

application.

Displays when AllShare Cast Hub is active, connected to

your device, and communicating.

Displays when Hangout updates are available for

download.

Displays when updates are available for download.

Displays when a Play Store download has completed.

Understanding Your Device 45

Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and

communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).

Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an

available open wireless network.

Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and configured

for a direct connection to another compatible device

in the same direct communication mode.

Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is communicating

with another compatible device.

Displays when a share shot has been established with

other users via a Wi-Fi Direct connection.

Displays when you are currently in Emergency calling

mode. You must exit this mode to resume normal

calling function.

Displays in the notifications window when action is

required within the Samsung account application.

Displays in the notifications window when there are

too many on-screen notification icons to display.

Tap to show more notifications.

Tap to select a text input method.

Displays in the notifications window when a song is

currently playing within the Music Player.

Displays in the notifications window when a song is

currently playing within the Play Music application.

For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see “Changing

Your Settings” on page 321.

Displays when your device’s GPS is on and

communicating.

Displays when the external SD card (internal

microSD) has been disconnected (unmounted) from the

phone and is now ready for either removal or formatting.

Displays when the External SD card is being prepared

for mounting to the device. This is required for

communication with the External SD card.

Displays when the microSD card has been

improperly removed or unexpectedly.

Displays when Power saving mode is enabled.

Displays when the Power saving alert notification has been

activated. You are then prompted to view your current

battery level.

Displays when TTY device has been inserted.

Understanding Your Device 47

Notification Bar

The Notification area indicates new message events (data sync

status, new messages, calendar events, call status, etc). You can

expand this area to display the Notification screen that provides

more detailed information about the current on-screen notification

icons.

1. Touch the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then

drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the

Notifications screen (1).

2. Tap a notification entry to open the associated

application (2).

Clearing Notifications

1. In a single motion, touch and drag the Status bar down to the

bottom of the screen to open the Notifications screen.

2. Tap

Clear

. The notifications are cleared from the panel.

Accessing Additional Screen Functions

In addition to notifications, this screen also provides quick and ready

access to separate device functions. These can be quickly activated

or deactivated by toggling them on or off.

The following functions can either be activated (green) or

deactivated (gray):

Wi-Fi

GPS

Sound/Vibrate/Mute

Screen rotation

Bluetooth

Mobile data

Blocking mode

Power saving

Multi window

and

Sync

Understanding Your Device 49

Function Keys

Your device comes equipped with three main function keys that can

be used on any screen:

Home

, and

Back

Home Key

The

Home

key ( ) takes you back to your Home screen

(#4 of the 7 available screens).



Press and hold to launch the Recent apps/Task manager

screen. For more information, refer to “Accessing Recently-

Used Applications” on page 70.

Menu Key

The

key ( ) activates an available menu function for the

current screen or application.

Back Key

The

Back

key ( ) returns you to the previously active screen. If the

on-screen keyboard is currently open, this key closes the keyboard.

Home Screen

The Home screen is the starting point for using the applications on

your phone. There are initially seven available panels, each

populated with default shortcuts or applications. You can customize

each of these panels.

•

Notification area

displays those icons associated with end-user

notifications such as: email messages, calls (missed, call in progress),

new voicemail, upcoming event, USB connection, Emails, and Text/MMS

messages.

Google search

Home Screen

Primary

Notification

Shortcuts

Status Bar

area

Status

area

Shortcuts

Battery status

Connection Status

Time

Signal strength

Understanding Your Device 51

–

These notifications appear at the top-left of the screen (within the

Status bar area) and display important user information.

–

This information can be accessed by swiping down from the Status bar

(page 47).

•

Status area

displays those icons associated with the status of the device

such as communication, coverage, Bluetooth, 4G/3G,

Wi-Fi communication, battery levels, GPS, etc.

•

Home Screen

is a customizable screen that provides information about

notifications and device status, and allows access to application Widgets.

•

Extended Home Screens

extend beyond the current visible screen width

to provide more space for adding icons, widgets, and other customization

features.

–

There are six available extended screens (panels) each of which may be

populated with its own shortcuts or widgets. These screens share the

use of the five Primary Shortcuts.

–

The current screen is indicated at the bottom by a white square. Up to

seven (7) total screens are available.

Note:

Both the status bar and primary shortcuts are visible across all

screens.

•

Google search

is an on-screen Internet search engine powered by

Google™. Tap to access the Voice Actions feature where you can verbally

enter a search term and initiate an online search.

–

Tap (

Voice Actions

) to launch the function from within this

Google widget.

•

Widgets

are self-contained on-screen applications (not shortcuts). These

can be placed onto any of the available screens (Home or extended).

•

Shortcuts

are icons that launch available device applications such as

Camera, YouTube, Contacts, Phone, Email, Play Store, etc. These function

the same as shortcuts on your computer.

–

Although some may already be found on the Extended Home screens,

the majority can also be found within the Applications screens.

–

The Application screens can be accessed by tapping (

Apps

) from

the Primary shortcuts area.

–

Shortcuts can be removed from a screen and added back any number

of times.

•

Primary Shortcuts

: are four shortcuts present throughout all of the

available screens and can be used to both navigate within the device or

launch any of the following functions:

–

Phone

( ) launches the phone-related screen functions (Keypad,

Logs, Favorites, and Contacts).

–

Contacts

( ) launches the Contacts-related screens (Phone,

Groups, Favorites, and Contacts).

–

Messaging

( ) launches the Messaging menu (create new

messages or open an existing message string).

–

Internet

( ) launches the built-in Web browser.

–

Apps

toggles functionality between the Home and Application screens.

•

Tap (

Apps

) to access the Application screens loaded with every

available local application.

•

While in the Applications screens, tap

(

Back

) to easily return to the

Home screen.

As you transition from screen to screen, a screen indicator (located

at the bottom) displays the currently active panel.

Understanding Your Device 53

Home Screen Menu Settings

When on the Home screen, press to reveal the following menu

options:

•

Add apps and widgets

allows you to quickly access the Widget tab

where you can then drag a selected widget to an available area on a

selected screen.

•

Create folder

allows you to create on-screen folders to help organize files

of application shortcuts.

•

Set wallpaper

allows you to assign the current wallpaper for the Home

screen, Lock screen, or Home screen and lock screens. Choose from

Gallery, Live wallpapers, or Wallpapers.

•

Edit page

allows you to add or remove extended screens from your

device. You can have up to six extended screens (one Home screen and six

Extended screens).

•

displays the Google Search box that you can use to search for a

key term online.

•

Settings

provides quick access to the device’s settings menu.

–

The Settings menu can also be accessed by pressing and then

tapping

➔

Settings

Applications

The Application menu provides quick access to the most frequently

used applications. Applications display on each of the three panels

on the Applications screens.

Important!

Once you log into your Google account. All previously

downloaded apps should now be populated within the

Application screens.

Application Screen Menu Settings

When on the Apps screen, the following menu options are available:

1. From the Home screen, tap

(

Apps

2. Press and then select from the following options:

•Play Store

: provides quick access to the Play Store (page 278).

•Edit

: allows you to add a new folder to the Application screen and then

drag/drop an existing application into it. This feature requires the view be

set to Customizable view.

• Create folder

: allows you to create an application folder where you can

better organize and group desired apps.

• Uninstall

: allows you to uninstall a user-downloaded application. Only

those applications that are not default to the device can be downloaded.

Tap to remove the selected app.

• Downloaded applications

: allows you to filter the view of apps to only

those applications that you have downloaded.

•View type

: allows you to customize the way the Apps menu listing is

shown (page 75).

Understanding Your Device 55

•Share apps

: allows you to share information about selected applications

with external users (page 73).

• Hide applications

: allows you to specify which current applications are

hidden from view in this menu. Once you have selected the apps, tap

Done

• Show hidden applications

: allows you to specify which previously

hidden applications are can be made visible again for viewing in this

menu. Once you have selected the apps, tap

Done

3. Press to return to the Home screen.

Important!

For help closing any or all current applications, use the

Task manager. For more information, refer to “Task

Manager” on page 28.

Screen Navigation

Using the touch screen display and the keys, you can navigate the

features of your device and enter characters. The following

conventions are used in this manual to describe the navigation

action in the procedures.

Navigating Through the Screens

The following terms describe the most common hardware and on-

screen actions.

•

Press and hold

Pressing relates to use of the hardware keys and buttons

to select or activate an item. For example: press the Navigation key to

scroll through a menu. Some buttons and keys require you to press and

hold them to activate a feature, for example, you press the Power/End key

to lock and unlock the phone.

•

Tap

: Use a brief touch to select items on the display or to enter text on the

virtual QWERTY keyboard. For example: touch an Application icon to open

the application. A light touch works best.

•

Touch and hold

: Touch and hold an icon or key to open the available

options, or to access a pop-up menu. For example: touch and hold from

the Home screen to access a menu of customization options.

•

Flick

: Move your finger in lighter, quicker strokes than swiping. This finger

gesture is always used in a vertical motion, such as when flicking through

contacts or a message list.

•

Swipe or slide

: Quickly drag your finger vertically or horizontally across

the screen. This allows you to move the area of focus or to scroll through a

list. For example: slide your finger left or right on the Home screen to scroll

among the seven panels.

•

Drag

: Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start to

move it. Do not release your finger until you have reached the target

position.

•

Rotate

: Automatically change the screen orientation from portrait to

landscape by turning the device sideways. For example: rotate to

landscape orientation when entering text, to provide a larger keyboard, or

when viewing web content to minimize scrolling.

•

Pinch

: “Pinch” the screen using your thumb and

forefinger to zoom out when viewing a picture or

a Web page. (Move fingers inward to zoom out.)

•

Spread

: “Spread” the screen using your thumb

and forefinger to zoom in when viewing a picture or a Web page. (Move

fingers outward to zoom in.)

Understanding Your Device 57

Note:

These screens can be re-arranged in any desired order. For

more information, refer to “Customizing the Screens” on

page 71.

•

Motion Navigation and Activation

: The device comes equipped with the

ability to assign specific functions to certain device actions that are

detected by both the accelerometer and gyroscope.

Note:

Motion must be enabled for this feature to be active. For more

information, refer to “Motion Settings” on page 386.

Accessing Recently-Used Apps

1. Press and hold from any screen to open the

recently-used applications window.

2. Tap an icon to open the selected application.

– or –

Tap to go to the Task manager.

– or –

Tap to go to Google Search.

– or –

Tap to delete the record of all recently used applications.

Using Gestures

By activating the various gesture features within the Motion menu

(page 386), you can access a variety of time saving functions.

To activate motion:

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Motion

2. Activate the feature by touching and sliding the

Motion

activation

slider to the right to turn it on.

3. Tap the desired on-screen motion option.

The following is a description some of the most commonly

used gestures:

•

Direct call

: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently displayed on-

screen Contact entry as soon as you place the device to your ear.

•

Smart alert

: Once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and notified of

you have missed any calls or messages.

•

Double tap to top

: Once enabled, double tap the top of the device to be

taken to the top of the current on-screen list.

•

Tilt to zoom

: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where content can

be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two points on the display

then tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out.

•

Pan to move icon

: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired application

shortcut icon or widget on the screen. Once it detaches, move the device

left or right to migrate it to a new location.

•

Pan to browse images

Once enabled, touch and hold a desired on-

screen image to pan around it. Move the device left or right to pan

vertically or up and down to pan horizontally around the large on-screen

image.

Understanding Your Device 59

•

Shake to update

: Once enabled, shake your device to rescan for

Bluetooth devices, rescan for Wi-Fi devices, Refresh a Web page, etc..

•

Turn over to mute/pause

: Once enabled, mute incoming calls and any

playing sounds by turning the device display down on a surface. This is

the opposite of the Pickup to be Notified Gesture.

•

Sensitivity setting and tutorial

: provides access to advanced gesture

settings and tutorials such as:

• Sensitivity settings

: When any of the following features are enabled,

you can then adjust their sensitivity.

Choose from: Gyroscope calibration, Tilt to zoom, Pan to move icon, and

Pan to browse images.

• Learn about motions

: tap an on-screen entry to display a brief tutorial

on the use of the selected function.

Note:

Sensitivity settings are only accessible if the gesture is currently

active.

•

Palm swipe to capture

: Once enabled, you can capture any

on-screen information swiping across the screen. In a single motion, press

the side of your hand on the screen and swipe form left to right. The image

is then copied to the clipboard.

•

Palm touch to mute/pause

: Once enabled, you can pause any

on-screen video or mute any current sound by simply covering the screen

with your hand. Once you remove your hand from the screen, the device

goes back to normal by either continuing to play the current video or

unmuting the current sound.

•

Learn about hand motions

: Provides you with on-screen tutorials about

selected motions such as: Palm swipe to capture and Palm touch to mute/

pause.

Gyroscope Calibration

Calibrate your device by using the built-in gyroscope.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Motion

➔

Sensitivity settings

➔

Gyroscope calibration

2. Place the device on a level surface and tap

Calibrate

. The

device adjusts the level of the accelerometer. During the

calibration process a green circle appears on-screen and the

center circle adjusts to the center position.

Palm Swipe to

Screen Capture

Understanding Your Device 61

Using the Multi Window

This feature allows you to run multiple applications on the current

screen at the same time.

Note:

Only applications found within the Multi window panel can be

active atop another current application on the screen.

When launching applications that contain multimedia files

(music/video), audio from both files will be played

simultaneously.

Activating and Deactivating Multi window

To activate Multi window via the Notification screen:

1. In a single motion, touch the Status bar to reveal the

Notifications tab, and then drag it to the bottom of the screen

to open the Notifications screen (1).

2. Swipe the row of icons to the left until the Multi window icon is

displayed.

3. Tap the

Multi window

entry to activate the feature (2). The icon

turns green when active.

To activate Multi window via the Back button:

1. Press and hold the

Back

key ( ). The Multi window tab

appears (by default) on the left side of the screen.

Note:

Initially open activation, the entire apps panel is briefly

displayed, then minimized to only show the tab.

2. Tap the tab to open the application panel showing all the

available Multi window apps.

To deactivate Multi window:



Press and hold the

Back

key ( ). This action hides the Multi

window tab from view.

Understanding Your Device 63

Repositioning the Multi Window

The Multi window contains two components: tab and apps panel.

The tab can be manually moved across the screen. The apps panel

(containing the scrollable apps) can be relocated to lock onto the

different sides of the screen (top/bottom/left/right).

To move the tab:

1. Activate the Multi window feature.

2. In a single motion, touch and hold the tab for

approximately one-second, then slowly drag it to its new

location

along the current

screen edge.

Note:

This is a quick way to get the tab out of the way if you can’t get

to a button or option behind it.

To relocate the Multi window apps panel:

1. Activate the Multi window feature.

2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the scrollable

apps).

Note:

Notice that when the apps are visible, the tab turns a dark grey.

Its only in this state that the entire panel can be relocated.

3. In a single motion, touch and hold the grey tab for

approximately one-second to detach it from the screen (1),

then slowly drag it to its new location

along any other

available

screen edge (2).

Customizing the Multi Window apps

The applications found within the apps panel of the Multi window

can be organized by either being rearranged or removed.

To rearrange the Multi window applications:

1. Activate the Multi window feature.

2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the scrollable

apps).

3. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired app until it

detaches from the panel, then carefully drag it to a new

location in the list of apps. Lift your finger or stylus off the

screen to let go of the app and drop it into its new location.

Understanding Your Device 65

To remove a Multi window application:

1. Activate the Multi window feature.

2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the scrollable

apps).

3. Tap the

Edit

button (located at the bottom of the list) to reveal a

staging area that can house any removed applications from the

Multi window panel.

4. Tap

Done

once you have completed the removal process.

To restore a Multi window application:

1. Activate the Multi window feature.

2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the scrollable

apps).

3. Tap the

Edit

button (located at the bottom of the list) to reveal

the staging area containing any previously removed apps.

4. Locate the desired application.

5. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired app until it

detaches from the staging area, then carefully drag it to a new

location in the current list of apps.

Using Multi Window to run multiple apps on the same

screen

Any of the apps found within the Multi window panel can be run at

the same time as a current on-screen app.

Once multiple apps are running on the same screen, you can then

choose to either swap their positions or maximize a desired app.

Note:

Only applications found within the Multi-window panel can be

active atop another current application on the screen.

When launching applications that contain multimedia files

(music/video), audio from both files will be played

simultaneously.

In this example we will be launching both the Internet and Maps

applications.

1. Launch an application.

•

From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Internet

2. Activate the Multi window feature.

3. Tap the tab to display the apps panel.

4. Touch and hold the desired app, such as Maps, until it

detaches from the panel.

5. In a single motion, drag it over the current app and drop the

new Multi window app over either the top or bottom area of the

current on-screen app.

Understanding Your Device 67

Note:

Once two applications are running, the device displays a split

screen view containing both the initial app and the new Multi

window app. Each application is still independent of the other.

To switch the arrangement of the applications:

1. With the two applications

shown in a split screen, tap the

Border bar to show the

on-screen icons.

2. Tap the desired application

area (top or bottom).

3. Locate and tap (

Switch

app location

). The current apps

are switched.

To increase the size of a desired

application window:

1. With the two applications

shown in a split screen, locate

the Border bar indicating the

edge of the app window.

2. In a single motion, touch and

hold the Border bar then drag it

to resize the desired window.

App #1 Split/Maximize

App #2 Border Switch

Positionsbar

To split the current applications:

1. With the two applications shown in a split screen, tap the

Border bar to show the on-screen icons.

2. Tap the desired application area (top or bottom).

3. Locate and tap (

Maximize the app

). The current apps are

the both maximized.

Menu Navigation

You can tailor the device’s range of functions to fit your needs using

both menus and applications. Menus, sub-menus, and features are

accessed by scrolling through the available on-screen menus. Your

device defaults with seven screens.

Navigating Through the Application Menus

There are three default Application Menu screens available. As you

add more applications from the Play Store, more screens are created

to house these new apps.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

). The first Application

Menu screen displays.

•

To close the Applications screen, press

(

Home

)

2. Sweep the screen to access the other menus.

3. Tap any of the on-screen icons to launch the associated

application.

Understanding Your Device 69

Using Sub-Menus

Sub-menus are available from within most screen and applications.

1. Press . A sub-menu displays at the bottom of the screen.

2. Tap an available on-screen option.

Sub-Menu items

Using Context Menus

Context menus (also called pop-up menus) contain options that

apply to a specific item on the screen. They function similarly to

menu options that appear when you right click your mouse on your

desktop computer.



Touch and hold an item on-screen to open its context menu.

Accessing Recently-Used Applications

1. Press and hold to open the recently-used applications

window.

Note:

This recent applications screen also provides access to the

Task

manager

2. A pop-up displays the six most recently used applications.

3. Tap an icon to open the recent application.

Context

Understanding Your Device 71

Customizing the Screens

You can customize the Home screens (panels) to display the Widgets,

Shortcuts, Folders, or Wallpapers. For example, one screen could

contain the Music Player shortcut and other forms of media, while

another screen might contain communication apps such as Gmail.

You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:

•

Adding, Deleting, and Rearranging screens

•

Assigning a New Home screen

•

Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts

•

Sharing Application Information

•

Managing Shortcuts

•

Adding and Removing Widgets

•

Changing the Background (Wallpapers)

Adding and Deleting Screens

Your phone comes with seven screens. You can delete these screens

and then add them back later.

Note:

These screens can be deleted and re-arranged.

Important!

Your phone can only contain at most seven screens and at

least one screen.

To delete a screen:

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Edit page

2. Touch and hold, then drag the undesired screen down to the

Remove

tab ( ).

3. Press to return to the main Home screen.

To add a screen:

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Edit page

2. Tap (

Add screen

). The newly added screen appears as

the last page.

3. Press to return to the main Home screen.

Rearranging the Screens

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Edit page

2. Touch and hold a screen and then drag it into its new location.

Upper-left is screen position #1 and bottom-right is screen last

screen.

Assigning a New Home Screen

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Edit page

2. Tap . The new Home screen then indicates this

(

Home screen

) icon at the top of the selected screen.

Understanding Your Device 73

Sharing an App

The device’s Applications menu now comes with a feature that

allows you to share information about your selected applications

with external users.

1. From the Home screen, tap

(

Apps

2. Press and then tap

Share apps

3. Place a check mark alongside those applications you wish to

share information about and tap

Done

Note:

Shared applications consist of those that have previously been

downloaded from the Play Store.

4. Select a sharing method. Choose from: Bluetooth, Email,

Gmail, Google, Google+, Hangouts, Messaging, S Memo, and

Wi-Fi Direct.

5. The recipient will be notified about the receipt of the new

information.

Managing Shortcuts

Note:

To move a shortcut from one screen to another, you must

carefully touch and hold the shortcut and slowly drag it to the

edge of the screen. As the shortcut turns light blue, you can

begin to move it to the adjacent screen.If this does not work,

delete it from its current screen. Activate the new screen and

then add the selected shortcut.

To add a shortcut from the Applications screen:

1. Press to go to the Home screen.

2. Select a screen location for your new shortcut by scrolling

across your available screens until you reach the desired one.

3. Tap

Apps

( ) to reveal all your current available

applications. By default, applications are displayed as an

Alphabetical grid.

4. Scroll across the screens and locate your desired application.

5. Touch and hold the on-screen icon. The new shortcut then

appears to hover over the current screen.

6. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the current

screen. Once complete, release the screen to lock the shortcut

into its new position.

To add a shortcut via the Add to Home screen:

1. Press to go to the Home screen.

2. Navigate to a screen with an empty area.

3. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.

4. From the

Home screen

window, tap

Apps and widgets

➔

Apps

5. Scroll across the pages and tap a selection.

To delete a shortcut:

1. Press to go to the Home screen.

2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it from its

location on the current screen.

3. Drag the shortcut over the

Remove

tab ( ) and release it.

Understanding Your Device 75

Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts

Note:

You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the

exception of the

Apps

shortcut.

To remove a primary shortcut:

1. Press to go to the Home screen.

2. Touch and hold the primary shortcut you want to replace, then

drag it to an empty space on any available screen. The primary

shortcuts are now updated to show an empty slot.

To insert a new primary shortcut:

1. From the Home screen, tap

(

Apps

2. Locate your desired application, then touch and hold the on-

screen icon to position it on a desired screen. For more

information, refer to “Managing Shortcuts” on page 73.

3. Locate the screen with the desired shortcut you want to add as

the new primary shortcut.

4. Touch and hold the shortcut until it detaches from the screen.

5. In a single motion, touch and hold the new shortcut, then drag

it to the empty space in the row of primary shortcuts. The new

primary shortcut will now appear on both the Home and

Extended screens.

Adding and Removing Widgets

Widgets are self-contained applications that can be placed on any

screen. Unlike shortcuts, widgets appear as applications.

To add a Widget:

1. From the Home screen, tap

(

Apps

) ➔

Widgets

tab.

2. Scroll across the Widget pages and locate a desired Widget.

3. Touch and hold an available Widget until it detaches from the

screen.

4. While still holding the Widget, scroll left or right across the

available screens and let go of the Widget to place it on your

current screen.

To remove a Widget:

1. Touch and hold a Widget until it unlocks from the current

screen.

2. Drag the widget over the

Remove

tab ( ) and release it.

•

As you place the Widget into the Trash, both items turn red.

•

This action doesn’t delete the Widget, it just removes it from the current

screen.

To place a widget onto a different screen:

1. Touch and hold the widget until it becomes transparent.

2. Slowly drag it past the edge of the screen until the adjacent

page appears highlighted and it then snaps onto the new page.

3. Drag the widget to its desired position on the new screen.

4. Repeat these steps to continue moving it to other screens.

Understanding Your Device 77

Managing Wallpapers

Wallpapers consist of either Gallery images (user taken), Live

wallpapers (animated backgrounds), or Wallpaper gallery (default

phone wallpapers).

Note:

Selecting animated Live wallpapers will require additional

battery power.

To change the current Home screen wallpaper:

1. Navigate to any screen.

– or –

Press to go to the Home screen.

2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.

3. From the

Home screen

window tap

Set wallpaper

➔

Home

screen

4. Select a Wallpaper type:

•

Tap

Gallery

to select from a user image stored in the camera image

gallery, crop the image, and tap

Done

•

Tap

Live wallpapers

to select from a list of animated backgrounds,

once done tap

Set wallpaper

•

Tap

Wallpapers

, scroll through the images, tap a wallpaper image, then

tap

Set wallpaper

Note:

Wallpapers supports the following image types: JPEG, PNG, GIF,

BMP, and W B M P.

To change Wallpapers from Settings Menu:

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Display

➔

Wallpaper

2. Access an available option. Choose from

Home screen

Lock

screen

, or

Home and lock screens

Note:

The

Home and lock screens

is an additional option that allows

you to change both screens at the same time.

3. Select a wallpaper type (

Gallery

Live wallpaper

, or

Wallpapers

4. Choose an image and tap

Done

Set wallpaper

To change the current Lock screen wallpaper:

1. Navigate to any screen, touch and hold an empty area of the

screen, and tap

Set wallpaper

➔

Lock screen

– or –

From the main

Settings

page, tap

Display

➔

Wallpaper

➔

Lock

screen

2. Select a Wallpaper type:

•

Tap

Gallery

to select from a user image stored in the camera image

gallery, crop the image, and tap

Done

•

Tap

Wallpaper

, scroll through the images, tap a wallpaper image, then

tap

Set wallpaper

Call Functions and Contacts List 79

Section 3: Call Functions and Contacts

List

This section describes features and functionality associated with

making or answering calls, and the Contacts list, which is used to

store contact information.

Displaying Your Phone Number



From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

➔

About device

➔

Status

. Your phone number displays in the

My phone number

field.

Note:

The device’s

Settings

menu can also be activated by pressing

and then tapping (

Apps

) ➔ (

Settings

Making a Call

You can store phone numbers that are regularly used to the SIM card

or to the device’s memory. These entries are referred to as the

Contacts list

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Phone

2. Enter the phone number and then tap .



If you make a mistake while dialing, tap to clear the last

digit. Touch and hold to clear the entire sequence.

Note:

If your screen goes black during your interaction with the device

(Launching Keypad, etc.), you might be accidentally swiping

over the front sensors.

Quick Dialing a Number from the Contacts List

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Contacts

2. Locate a contact from the list.

3. In a single motion, touch and drag your finger over the number

by going to the right. This action places a call to the recipient.

Quick

Texting

Calling

Call Functions and Contacts List 81

Running a Call in the Background

If you exit the current call screen and return to the Home screen, you

are visually notified that you are still on an active call by the green

phone icon within the Status bar.

This is the best way to stay on your current call and do something

else (multi-task) such as access the Contacts list, view a recent

email, locate a picture, etc..

Ending a Call



Briefly tap key to end the call.

Note:

To redial a recent number, tap at the end of the call or

locate the number from the Logs list, tap the entry and tap

Call

Ending a Call from the Status Bar

1. From an active call, you can launch a separate application or

return to the Home screen. The current call is kept active in the

background.

2. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then

drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the

Notifications panel.

3. Tap (

End

) to end the currently active call.

In Call Notification

End call

End

Making Emergency Calls

If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn on the

phone, the

Insert SIM card to make calls

message displays and an

animated tutorial shows you how to install the SIM card.

Without a SIM card, you can only make an emergency call with the

phone; normal cell phone service is not available.

Making an Emergency Call Without a SIM card installed

1. Tap

Emergency call

from the on-screen display to make an

emergency call.

2. Enter 9-1-1 and tap . Complete your call. During this

type of call, you will have access to the Speaker mode,

Keypad, and End Call features.

Note:

Selecting Location consent may drain battery power. For more

information, refer to “Power Saving Mode” on page 356.

3. Tap to exit this calling mode.

Making an Emergency Call With a SIM card installed

The Emergency calling mode makes redialing an emergency number

a 1-tap process. Before you can resume normal calling operations,

you should first exit this mode.

1. Swipe the Lock screen to unlock the device.

2. From the Home screen, tap .

3. Enter the emergency number (ex: 911) and then tap .

End call

Call Functions and Contacts List 83

4. Complete your call. During this type of call, you will have

access to the Speaker mode, Keypad, and End Call features.

5. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit the mode.

Dialing Options

When you enter numbers on the Keypad, you will see three

on-screen options.

From the keypad screen, use one of the following options:

•

Voicemail

( ) to access your Voicemail service.

•

Call

( ) to call the entered number.

•

Delete

( ) to delete digits from the current number.

To view additional dialing options:



Tap :

• Send message

to send the current caller a text message while still

maintaining the current call active.

• Add to Contacts

to add the current number to either a new or existing

Contacts entry.

• Speed dial setting

to access the Speed Dialing menu where you can

assign a speed dial location to a current Contacts entry.

• Add 2 sec pause

to insert a two-second pause to enter a

2-second delay within a number string (the phone continues dialing after

2 seconds without any additional keys being pressed.

•Add wait

to insert a hard pause within the number string (the phone

waits for your input). A wait requires that any consecutive numbers be

manually sent by tapping

Yes

• Call settings

to provide you access to the Call settings screen.

Answering a Call

When somebody calls you, the phone rings and displays the

incoming call image. The caller's phone number, picture, or name if

stored in Contacts List, displays.



At the incoming call screen:

•

Touch and slide to answer the call.

•

Touch and slide to reject the call.

•

Touch and drag the

Reject call with message

tab upward and tap a

predefined rejection message or tap

Create new message

to create a

new custom outgoing response.

Call Functions and Contacts List 85

Pressing the Volume down button mutes the ringer.

If the incoming call is from a number stored in your Contacts, the

entry’s name is displayed. You may also see the caller’s phone

number, if available.

Managing Reject Calls

This feature allows you to categorize both known and unknown

callers as rejected contacts. These Contacts are then added to you

Rejection list which can be managed for individual entries from

within the Contacts list or as a whole from the Call rejection screen.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Phone

2. Press and then tap

Call settings

page, tap

Call restriction

3. In a single motion touch and slide to the right of the

Auto reject mode

slider to turn it on . The slider color

indicates the activation status of the Auto reject mode.

Touch and

slide in any

direction to Touch and slide

in any direction

to reject the call

Touch and drag

upward to reject

with a message

answer the

call

OFF

• OFF:

disables the automatic rejection feature. You must then manually

reject incoming phone calls.

4. Tap the

Auto reject mode

field to configure your automatic

rejection settings. Rejected calls are routed automatically to

your voicemail. Choose from:

•All numbers

: enables the features for all known and unknown numbers,

including those contacts that are not assigned to the rejection list.

• Auto reject numbers

: automatically rejects all entries assigned to the

Reject list/Blacklist.

Adding numbers to the rejection list

Entries can be added to the list via either the Contacts menu or via

the Auto reject list menu. The Contacts menu option assigns all

numbers for an individual as rejected. The Auto reject list allows to

assign individual numbers.

To assign single number as rejected via Auto reject list:

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Phone

2. Press and then tap

Call settings

page, tap

Call restriction

➔

Auto reject list

3. Tap (

Create

) and either enter the phone number or select

a Contact from your Logs or Contacts list.

4. Tap

Save

to complete the assignment.

Call Functions and Contacts List 87

International Calls

1. From the Home screen, tap and then touch and hold

until the device shows “+” on-screen.

2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code, area

code, and phone number.

3. If you make a mistake, tap once to delete a single digit.

4. Touch and hold to delete all digits.

5. Tap .

Pause Dialing

You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with

automated systems, such as voicemail or financial phone numbers.

•

2 Second Pause

automatically sends the next set of numbers after a

two-second pause. This is indicated in the number string as a comma (

•

Wait

sends the next set of numbers only after tapping . This is

indicated in the number string as a semicolon (

;

1. From the Home screen, tap and use the

on-screen keypad to enter the phone number.

2. Press and then tap

Add 2 sec pause

. This feature adds an

automatic two-second pause.

3. Use the keypad to enter the additional numbers that will be

dialed automatically after the second pause.

Tip:

You can create pauses longer than three seconds by entering

multiple 2-sec pauses.

4. Tap .



Yes

Wait Dialing

Inserting a Wait into your dialing sequence means that the phone

waits until it hears a dial tone before proceeding with the next

sequence of numbers.

1. From the Home screen, tap and use the on-screen

keypad to enter the phone number.

2. Press and then tap

Add wait

. This feature causes the

phone to require your acceptance before sending the next set

of entered digits.

3. Tap .

4. Once prompted to

Send the following tones?

, tap to dial

the remaining digits.

Redialing the Last Number

The device stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed, received,

or missed if the caller is identified.

To recall any of these numbers:

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Tap the

Logs

tab to display the list of recent calls.

3. Tap the name/number and tap .

Yes

Call Functions and Contacts List 89

Speed Dialing

Once you have stored phone numbers from your Contacts List, you

can set up to 99 speed dial entries (2-100) and then dial them easily

whenever you want, simply by touching the associated numeric key.

Note:

Speed dial location #1 must be reserved for Voicemail use.

Setting Up Speed Dial Entries

Important!

Speed dial location #1 is reserved for Voicemail. No other

number can be assigned to this slot.

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Press

and then tap

Speed dial setting

. The

Speed dial

setting

screen displays a virtual list of locations with the

numbers 2 through 100.

3. Tap an unassigned number slot. The

Select contact

screen

displays.

4. Tap a contact and select a number to assign it to the speed dial

location. The selected contact number/image is displayed in

the speed dial number box.

Changing a Speed Dial Entry Order

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Press

and then tap

Speed dial setting

Important!

The number 1 is reserved for Voicemail and another

number cannot be assigned to this slot.

3. Press

and then tap

Change order

4. Tap the current entry then tap the new target speed dial

location.

Note:

Tapping 2 existing speed dial locations causes the entries to

switch positions.

5. Press to exit the Change order screen and return to the

previous screen.

Removing a Speed Dial Entry

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Press

and then tap

Speed dial setting

3. Touch and hold a existing on-screen speed dial location and

select

Delete

from the context menu.

– or –

Press

and then tap

Delete

. Tap an entry and select

(

Remove entry

4. Press to return to the previous screen.

Call Functions and Contacts List 91

Making a Call Using Speed Dial

You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in the

Contacts List for speed dialing.

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Touch and hold a previously created speed dial location

(numbers 2-100, or 1 if you are dialing voicemail) until the

number begins to dial.

3. If you are not certain of the speed dial location, tap

➔

Speed dial setting

and tap a speed dial

number to view the assigned phone number.

Using S Voice

This is a voice recognition application used to activate a wide variety of

functions on your device. This is a natural language recognition

application.

This goes beyond the Google Search Voice Actions feature

that simply recognizes Google commands and search terms.

You can ask it questions (Is it raining in Dallas?) or give it commands

(Show my where to find cheap gas).

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

) ➔ (

S Voice

2. Read the on-screen Samsung Disclaimer and tap

Confirm

3. Review the Terms of service and tap

Agree

to continue.

4. Navigate through the following on-screen tutorial screens by

reading the information and tapping

, or tap

Skip

continue without reading the information.

5. Wake up the application by repeating the phrase

Hi Galaxy

Note:

The wake-up command/phrase can be changed from “Hi

Galaxy” to anything else. For more information, refer to

“Samsung Unlock Options” on page 368.

6. Tap (

Speak

) if the device does not hear you or to give

it a command.

Example 1:

•

I want to find the best pizza online.

•

Tap and say “Find me the best Pizza”. This launches an

Internet search.

Example 2:

•

I want to find the nearest gas station.

•

Tap and say “Find me the nearest gas station”. This launches

the Map application and indicates where these are in relation to your

current position.

Call Functions and Contacts List 93

In Call Options

Your phone provides a number of features that are available for use

during a call.

Adjusting the Call Volume

During a call, use the Volume keys on the left side of the device, to

adjust the earpiece volume.



During a call, press the

volume key to increase the volume

level and the

Down

volume key to decrease the level.

– or –

Tap the on-screen

Extra volume

button to increase the

incoming call volume even more than by just using the volume

keys.

Dials

a number

Adds a

Activates or

Deactivates

Ends the

call

Mutes or Unmutes

Activates or

Deactivates

Bluetooth

the call Headset

speakerphone

Call

duration

new call

Noise

Reduction

Extra volume

enabled

•

Enabled/disabled via the Call settings menu (

Call settings

➔

Use

extra vol. for calls

). For more information, refer to

“Configuring

General Call Settings”

on page 337.

From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ring volume using

these keys.

Placing a Call on Hold

You can place the current call on hold whenever you want. If your

network supports this service, you can also make another call while

a call is in progress.

To make a new call while a call is in progress:

1. Enter the new phone number that you wish to dial or look it up

in Call history.

2. Tap

Add call

to dial the second call.

3. Dial the new phone number and tap .

Turning the Speakerphone on and off

While on a call, you can use your Speakerphone by following these

steps:

1. Tap (

Speaker off

) to toggle the speakerphone on.

2. Tap (

Speaker on

) to toggle the speakerphone off.

Tip:

When the speaker is turned

, the color of the speaker is green.

When the speaker is turned

Off

, the color of the speaker is gray.

Speaker

Call Functions and Contacts List 95

Muting a Call

1. Tap (

Mute off

) to turn mute on so the other caller cannot

hear you speaking.

2. Tap (

Mute on

) to turn mute off and resume your

conversation.

Switching to Bluetooth Headset

1. Pair the target Bluetooth headset prior to your call.

2. While on a call, switch to the Bluetooth headset instead of

speaker by tapping (

Headset off

3. At the prompt, tap

Turn on

to enable Bluetooth if it is not

already activated.

4. While on a call, switch back to the device speaker by tapping

(

Headset on

Mute

Headset

More In-call Options

During a call you can save the current caller’s information to the

Contacts list, or create a Memo.

Viewing the Contacts List

During a call you can look up a number in the Contacts list.

1. Press and then tap

Contacts

2. Browse the Contacts list for the information you need.

3. Press to return to the active call.

Creating a Message During a Call

During a call you can create a message.

1. Press and then tap

Message

➔ (

Compose

2. Address and create the message.

3. Review your message and tap (

Send

Creating a Memo During a Call

During a call it may be necessary to record information (a Note).

1. Press and then tap

Memo

2. Use the keyboard to enter the note then tap

Save

•

If desired, press

➔

Change background

to select a new memo

background color before saving. Tap

Done

to save the new selection.

Call Functions and Contacts List 97

Adjusting Noise Reduction

During a call it may be necessary to adjust the noise reduction

feature. Activating this feature can improve the quality of your

conversation by reducing ambient noise.

1. Press and then tap

Noise reduction off

to toggle the status

and activate the feature.

2. Press and then tap

Noise reduction on

to toggle the status

and deactivate the feature.

Adjusting the Call Sound Setting

During a call it may be necessary to adjust the sound equalizer for

the current call.

1. Press and then tap

My call sound

2. Select an available option.

Choose from: Off, Soft sound, Clear sound, Optimized for left

ear, or Optimized for right ear.

Multi-Party calls

Making a Multi-Party Call

A multi-party call is a network service that multiple people to

participate in a multi-party or conference call.

For further details about subscribing to this service, contact

customer service.

Setting up a Multi-Party Call

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Dial the number for the first participant and tap .

3. Tap

Add call

, enter the second phone number and

tap . The first caller is placed on hold.

4. Wait for the second caller to answer the incoming call and tap

Merge

. The two calls are now joined into a multi-party call and

display in the order in which they were called.

Important!

Multiple callers can be joined to a single

multi-party line. Additional callers participate in a new

Multiparty session and are held in conjunction with the

previous multiparty call. You can swap or place each multi-

party call on hold.

Call Waiting

You can answer an incoming call while you have a call in progress, if

this service is supported by the network.

You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone.

To answer a new call while you have a call in progress:

1. In a single motion, touch and slide it in any direction to

answer the new incoming call. The previous caller is placed on

hold and the new incoming call is made active.

Note:

The new caller appears at the top of the list. The previous caller

is placed on hold and appears at the bottom of the list.

2. Tap Swap to switch between the two calls. This places the

new caller on hold and activates the previous call.

Important!

The currently active call is displayed with a green

background.

Call Functions and Contacts List 99

3. Tap

Swap

again to switch back.

Logs Tab

The Logs tab is a list of the phone numbers (or Contacts entries) for

calls you placed, accepted, or missed. The Logs tab makes redialing

a number fast and easy. It is continually updated as your device

automatically adds new numbers to the beginning of the list and

removes the oldest entries from the bottom of the list.

The Notification area of the Home screen (upper-left) displays phone

notifications, status, or alerts such as:

Accessing the Logs Tab

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ (

Logs

tab).

2. Tap an entry to view available options.

Note:

The Logs tab only records calls that occur while the phone is

turned on. If a call is received while it is turned off, it will not be

included in your calling history.

Displays when a call is in progress.

Displays when a call was missed.

Logs

100

Each entry contains the phone number (if it is available) and

Contacts entry name (if the number is in your Contacts).

Accessing Logs from The Notifications Area

1. Locate from the Notifications area of the Status bar.

2. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then

drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the

Notifications panel.

3. Tap the Missed call entry to open the Logs screen.

This list provides easy access to redial an entry, or you can also

choose to access two types of history entry lists depending on how

they are touched.

Indicates all outgoing calls made from your device.

Indicates any received calls that were answered.

Indicates a missed call.

Indicates any received calls that were rejected.

Indicates auto rejected calls.

Call Functions and Contacts List 101

Call logs - Caller Overview

•

Tap a contact entry name or number to reveal the

Call options

screen:

• Create contact

to save the number if it is not already in your Contacts.

•Update existing

to update an existing Contacts entry with new

information.

•View contact

to view the selected Contact’s information.

•Call

allows you to redial the entry by name or number.

•Send message

allows you to create a new text message to the selected

entry.

•Time

provides the time and date of the call and its duration.

• Copy to dialing screen

press to edit the selected number before

you place your next outbound call.

•Delete

press to delete the Contacts entry.

• Send number

press to send the current Contacts entry

information to an external recipient.

• Add to reject list

press to add the current phone number to an

automatic rejection list. Similar to a block list, the selected caller will be

blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone.

•

Touch and hold an entry to display the entry-specific context menu:

• Call [Number]

to redial the current phone number.

•Send message

allows you to create a new text message to the selected

entry.

• Copy to dialing screen

to make alterations to the current phone

number prior to redial.

• Add to Contacts

to save the number if it is not already in your Contacts.

102

• Send number

to send the current Contacts entry information to an

external recipient.

•View contact

to view the information for the currently stored Contacts

entry.

• Add to reject list

to add the current phone number to an automatic

rejection list. Similar to a block list, the selected caller will be blocked

from making an incoming calls to your phone.

• Delete

to delete the entry from the Logs list.

Altering Numbers from the Logs List

If you need to make a call from the Logs screen and you need to

alter the number prior to dialing, you can add the appropriate prefix

by prepending the number.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ .

2. Touch and hold an entry to access the entry-specific context

menu.

3. Tap

Copy to dialing screen

4. Edit the number using the on-screen keypad or delete digits by

tapping to erase the numbers.

5. Tap once the number has been changed.

Logs

Call Functions and Contacts List 103

Erasing the Call logs List

You can delete either an individual call log entry or all current entries

from the Logs list.

To clear a single entry from the list:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ .

2. Touch and hold an entry and select

Delete

➔

To clear all entries from the list:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ .

2. Press and then tap

Delete.

3. Tap

Select all

4. Tap

Delete

to continue with the erasure.

– or –

Tap

Cancel

to stop the current process.

Viewing Missed Calls from Lock Screen

When you are unable to answer a call for any reason and your screen

is locked, the number of missed calls are displayed on the Lock

screen immediately after a call is missed.

1. Press (

Power/End

) to reactivate the screen.

2. Touch and drag the button (with the number of missed calls on

it) anywhere on the screen. The Logs tab is then displayed.

Logs

104

Section 4: Entering Text

This section describes how to select the desired text input method

when entering characters into your phone. This section also

describes the predictive text entry system that reduces the amount

of key strokes associated with entering text.

Your device comes equipped with an orientation detector that can

tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or sideways

(Landscape) orientation. This is useful when entering text.

Your phone also provides several on-screen keypad text entry

options to make the task of text entry that much easier.

Text Input Methods

There are three text input methods available:

•

Google voice typing

: provides a voice to text interface.

•

Samsung keyboard

(default): an on-screen QWERTY keyboard that

can be used in both portrait and landscape orientation.

•

Swype

: is enabled so as you can enter text as you swipe across the

on-screen keyboard. Instead of tapping each key, use your finger

to trace over each letter of a word.

The on-screen QWERTY keypad works the same in both portrait and

landscape mode.

Entering Text 105

Selecting the Text Input Method

The Text Input Method can be assigned from within one of two

locations:

Settings Menu:



From the main

Settings

page, tap

Language and input

➔

Default

and select an input method.

Text Input field:

1. From a screen where you can enter text, in a single motion,

touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the

screen to open the Notifications screen.

2. Tap (

Choose input method

) and select an available input

method.

Entering Text Using Swype

Swype™ is the default text input method that allows you to enter a

word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter, lifting your

finger between words. Swype uses error correcting algorithms and a

language model to predict the next word. Swype also includes a

touch predictive text system.

The on-screen keyboard options are different between the Android

keyboard and Swype on-screen input methods.

Note:

If after enabling Swype you are prompted to Contribute usage

date, read the on-screen disclaimer and tap either

Cancel

106

Enabling and Configuring Swype

If you configure another text input method (Samsung keyboard) you

must re-enable Swype before using the Swype keyboard.

When Swype is enabled there can also be normal keyboard

functionality.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Language and input

2. Tap

Default

➔

Swype

For more detailed information on Swype settings, see “Swype

Settings” on page 374.

Swype Text Entry Tips

You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video or

tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following Swype text

entry tips.

•

Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such as

apple).

•

Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a

selection.

•

Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter contractions.

•

Double-touch on the word you want to change to correct a misspelled

word, then touch the delete key to erase one character. Touch and hold the

delete key to erase an entire word.

Entering Text 107

Selecting a Text Input Mode in Swype

1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field

to reveal the on-screen keyboard.

2. With Swype as your text entry method, select one of the

following text mode options:

•ABC

to use Swype with alphanumeric characters from the on-

screen keyboard.

•SYM

(Symbol)

to enter numbers and symbols from the

on-screen keyboard.

Note:

After typing an initial uppercase character, the key changes

to and all letters that follow are in lower case.

Swype Keyboard Overview

•Recipients

: a field where you can enter the recipients of the current

message. You can choose from

Groups

Favorites

Contacts

, or

Logs

• Text Input field

: a field where text, number, or other characters can be

entered.

• CAPS/ALT key

: When in 123ABC mode, this key changes the

capitalization of the subsequent entered characters. When in SYM

mode, this key can show additional symbol characters.

• SWYPE settings

: Touch and hold this button to access the Swype

settings screen.

Edit

ABC

123

+!=

108

• Text Input mode

: There are two available modes:

123ABC

and

SYM.

–

123ABC mode contains alphanumeric characters and a few common

punctuation marks. Text mode button indicates

SYM

–

SYM mode contains only symbols and numbers. Text mode button

indicates

123ABC

Text input field

CAPS/ALT

Text Input mode

Delete

Current

SWYPE Settings

key

Recipients

Mode

Suggestions

Entering Text 109

Using 123ABC Mode in SWYPE

123ABC

mode, you can enter only letters and a few common

punctuation marks from the on-screen keyboard. The text mode key

shows .

1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field

to reveal the on-screen keyboard.

2. Tap to configure the keyboard for 123ABC mode

(showing letters and numbers on the on-screen keys). Once in

this mode, the text input type shows .

Note:

After typing an initial uppercase character, the key changes

to and all letters that follow are in lower case.

3. Swipe your finger continuously over the letters to form a word.

–

If you make a mistake, tap to erase a single character. Touch and

hold to erase an entire word.

4. Tap (

Send

) to deliver the message.

All lowercase

Displays when the next character is entered in lowercase.

Pressing this while in 123SYM mode, reveals additional

numeric-symbols keys.

Initial Uppercase

Displays when the first character of each word is

entered as uppercase but all subsequent characters are

lowercase.

123

+!=

Edit

ABC

123

+!=

110

By default, the first letter of an entry is capitalized and the following

letters are lower case. After a word is entered and you lift your

finger, the cursor automatically adds a space after the word.

Note:

If multiple word choices exist for your Swype entry, an

on-screen popup appears to provide additional word choices.

Entering Numbers and Symbols in SWYPE

By using the on-screen keyboard in portrait mode, some symbols are

not available (such as Emoticons or Smileys).

In SYM mode using Swype, you can only enter symbols and numbers

from the on-screen keyboard.

Once in SYM mode, the text mode key shows .

1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field

to reveal the on-screen keyboard.

2. Tap to configure the keyboard for SYM mode. Once in

this mode, the text input type shows .

3. Tap the on-screen key for the number or symbol you want to

enter.

4. Tap to select from additional symbols.

For example:

•

To enter

: tap

➔

and select the

key.

All Uppercase

Displays when all characters will be entered as

uppercase characters.

Edit

ABC

123

+!=

Edit

ABC

123

+!=

Entering Text 111

Using the Samsung Keyboard

This QWERTY keyboard can be used to enter text in either a Portrait

or landscape orientation. The only difference between the two

orientations are the sizes of the keys.

From a screen where you enter text, rotate your phone

counterclockwise to a landscape orientation. The on-screen QWERTY

keyboard displays.

The Samsung Keyboard

This device has a built-in, QWERTY keypad (portrait mode) or

keyboard (landscape mode). Using the QWERTY keypad/ keyboard,

you can type letter, numbers, punctuation, and other characters.

To use the Samsung keyboard you must first configure the settings

to default to the Samsung keyboard.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Language and input

➔

Default

➔

Samsung keyboard

– or –

From a screen where you can enter text, in a single motion,

touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the

screen, then select (

Choose input method

)

➔

Samsung

keyboard

2. The virtual keyboard is then assigned to the Samsung

keyboard configuration for all subsequent text input.

112

For detailed information about the Samsung Keyboard settings, see

“Samsung Keyboard Settings” on page 377.

For detailed information about using Predictive Text, see “Predictive

Text - Advanced Settings” on page 378.

Text input field

Shift key

Input Mode

Input Options

DeleteCurrent Mode

Indicator Send

/Settings

Entering Text 113

Entering Text using Different Input Options

Although the default text input method with the Samsung keyboard

is to use the on-screen keys you have other options.

Note:

If you do not see the

Voice typing input method

button, touch and

hold and drag across the icons to select (

Settings

) then

select it from the available options.

1. From within an active message, tap the text input field to

reveal the on-screen keyboard.

2. Tap (

Input Methods

) to use the default Voice typing input

method to convert your spoken words to

on-screen text.

– or –

Touch and hold to select from other input methods such

as:

• Handwriting

to launch an on-screen handwriting area that can be used

to convert on-screen patterns (text) to text.

•Clipboard

to launch the device’s clipboard area from where you can

select a current clipboard item to place in your current message.

• Settings

to access the Samsung keyboard settings menu.

114

Changing the Text Input Mode in Keyboard

1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field

to reveal the on-screen keyboard.

2. With Samsung keyboard as your text entry method, select one

of the following text mode options:

•Abc

: to use alphabetic characters from the on-screen

keyboard. In this mode, the text mode button displays .

•Symbol/Numeric

: to enter numbers by pressing the numbers

selecting them on the on-screen keyboard. In this mode, the text mode

button displays .

There are up to 3 available pages of numeric symbols available by

tapping .

Note:

After typing an initial uppercase character, tap to toggle

capitalization.

All lowercase

Displays when the next character is entered in

lowercase.

Initial Uppercase

Displays when the first character of each word is

entered as uppercase but all subsequent characters are

lowercase.

ABC

123

Sym

123

Sym

ABC

1/3

Entering Text 115

By default, the first letter of a new entry is capitalized and the

following letters are lowercased. After a character is entered, the

cursor automatically advances to the next space.

Using ABC Mode in Samsung Keyboard

1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field

to reveal the on-screen keyboard.

2. Tap to configure the keyboard for ABC mode. Once in

this mode, the text input type shows .

Note:

After typing an initial uppercase character, the key changes

to and all letters that follow are in lower case.

3. Enter your text using the on-screen keyboard.

–

If you make a mistake, tap to erase a single character. Touch and

hold to erase an entire word.

4. Tap (

Send

) to deliver the message.

All Uppercase

Displays when all characters will be entered as

uppercase characters.

ABC

123

Sym

116

Using Symbol/Numeric Mode

Use the Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols,

or emoticons. While in this mode, the text mode key

displays .

1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field

to reveal the on-screen keyboard. Rotate the phone

counterclockwise to a landscape orientation, if desired.

2. Tap to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode. Once

in this mode, the text input type shows .

3. Tap a number, symbol, or emoticon character.

4. Tap to return to ABC mode.

To enter symbols:

1. Tap to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode.

2. Tap the appropriate symbol key.

– or –

Tap button to cycle through additional pages.

•

The first number on this key indicates which page (1, 2, or 3) of

additional characters is active.

ABC

123

Sym

ABC

123

Sym

1/3

Entering Text 117

Using the Google Voice Typing

This feature uses Google voice recognition to convert your spoken

words into on-screen text.

You can use your voice to enter text using the Google Voice typing

feature.

1. From the keyboard, touch the top of the screen and drag it

down to display your notification panel.

2. Tap (

Choose input method

) ➔

Google voice typing

3. At the Listening prompt (

Speak now

), speak clearly and

distinctly into the microphone.

The text is displayed in the message as you are speaking.

4. Tap (

Done

) when you are finished.

– or –

Tap (

Resume

) to resume recognition.

Note:

The feature works best when you break your message down

into smaller segments.

For detailed information about configuring Google Voice typing, see

“Configure Google Voice Typing” on page 380.

118

Using Google Voice Typing

1. From a screen where you can enter text, in a single motion,

touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the

screen, then select (

Choose input method

)

➔

Google

voice typing

. The virtual keyboard is then removed and all

subsequent input to done via the microphone as text to

speech.

2. Speak into the device’s microphone and watch your text being

entered on-screen.

3. If the text is incorrect, tap

DELETE

Contacts 119

Section 5: Contacts

This section explains how to use and manage your Contacts List. You

can save phone numbers to your phone’s memory.

Accounts

From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications to

synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if you want

the applications to synchronize automatically. After determining how

you want the accounts to synchronize, indicate which account to

synchronize with your Contacts list.

1. Sign in to your Google account.

2. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

) ➔ (

Settings

)

➔

Add account

3. Tap an account type to add.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions. The selected account type

synchronizes with your Contacts list.

120

Contacts List

Creating a Contact

The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your

Contacts List is your device’s built-in memory.

If existing Google and Corporate email accounts have been

synchronized to your phone, these will be made available to your

device during the creation of new entries. These new Contacts

entries can be assigned or saved to synced accounts such as Phone,

SIM, Google, or Corporate.

Your device automatically sorts the Contacts entries alphabetically.

You can create either a

Phone

Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync

Samsung account

, or

Google

contact.

Note:

Before you can save a contact to the Phone, Contact settings

must be set to

Save new contacts

Phone

Important!

The Google and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account

types are only visible after creating an email account of

those types on your phone.

•

Phone

contacts are stored locally on the device.

Note:

If the phone is ever reset to its factory default parameters,

contacts stored on the phone can be lost.

•

Samsung account

contacts are shared with your existing Samsung

account.

Contacts 121

•

Google

contacts are shared with your existing Google account and can

also be imported to your phone after you have created a Google Mail

account.

•

Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync

(also known as Work or Outlook)

contacts are those contacts that are intended to be shared with either an

Exchange Server or from within Microsoft

Outlook

•

Add new account

lets you create a new account type. Choose from

Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, Samsung account, or Google.

Note:

When storing an entry into your micro SIM card, note that only

the Name, and Number are saved. To save additional

information for a particular contact, such as notes, email, dates,

etc., it is important to save that Contact into your phone’s

onboard memory.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Contacts

2. Tap

to create a contact.

Note:

You can also add a new contact by entering a number from the

keypad and pressing and then tap

Add to Contacts

➔

Create contact

. Continue with step 3.

3. Tap a destination type (

Phone

Samsung account

Microsoft

Exchange ActiveSync

, or

Google

) (depending on where you

want to save the new contact information).

122

4. Tap the

Name

field and enter a name for this contact using the

displayed keypad.

•

Tap to access additional name entries such as: Name prefix, First

name, Middle name, Last name, and Name suffix.

5. Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact.

Selections are:

Image

Take picture

Note:

The label entries below can change and are dependant on the

selected destination type (ex: the Other and Custom might not

appear with an Exchange ActiveSync account destination type).

6. Tap the label button (to the left of the

Phone

field) and scroll

through the list to select a category such as

Mobile

Home

Work

Work Fax

Home Fax

Pager

Other

Custom

, or

Callback

7. Tap a phone number field and enter a phone number.

•

Tap on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously entered

phone number.

•

Tap to enter an additional phone number

•

Tap to remove a previously entered phone number.

Contacts 123

8. Enter additional information such as:

Address

Events

Groups

Ringtone

Message alert

Vibration pattern

or tap

Add

another field

to input additional category information.

•Add another field

contains the following options: Phonetic name,

Organization, IM, Notes, Nickname, Website, Internet call, or

Relationship.

•

Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields and

categories.

9. Tap

Save

to complete and store the new entry.

– or –

Tap

Cancel

to delete the current entry.

To save a Number from your Keypad:

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Phone

2. Enter a phone number using the on-screen dialpad.

3. Tap

Add to Contacts

➔

Create contact

or select the Contact

entry from the on-screen list.

– or –

Press and then tap

Add to Contacts

➔

Create contact

select the Contact entry from the on-screen list.

•

If you're updating an existing contact, tap the entry from the list and

proceed to step 5.

4. Tap a destination type (

Phone

SIM

Samsung account

Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync

, or

Google

) (depending on

where you want to save the new contact information).

124

5. Tap the

Name

and enter a name for this contact using the

displayed keypad.

•

Tap to access additional name entries such as: Name prefix, First

name, Middle name, Last name, and Name suffix.

6. Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact.

Selections are:

Image

Take picture

Note:

The label entries below can change and are dependant on the

selected destination type (ex: the Other and Custom might not

appear with an Exchange ActiveSync account destination type).

7. Tap the label button (to the left of the

Phone

field) and scroll

through the list to select a category such as

Mobile

Home

Work

Work Fax

Home Fax

Pager

Other

Custom

, or

Callback

8. Enter additional fields as desired.

9. Tap

Save

to complete and store the new entry.

– or –

Tap

Cancel

to delete the current entry.

Note:

For further details about how to enter characters, see “Text

Input Methods” on page 104

Contacts 125

Finding a Contact

You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names onto

either your SIM card, your phone’s built-in memory, or an external

location (such as Google or Exchange). They are all physically

separate but are used as a single entity, called Contacts.

Depending on the storage size of the particular SIM card, the

maximum number of phone numbers the card can store may differ.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Contacts

2. Swipe up or down until you see the contact displayed.

– or –

Tap the

field and begin entering the entry’s name.

Matching entries are then displayed. This process filters

through all of your current account Contact entries to only

show you the matching entries.

– or –

In a single motion, touch and hold the letter tab area (on the

right) until on-screen letters appear, then scroll through the

list. You are then taken to that section of the Contacts list.

Touch the contact entry.

126

Editing Contact Information

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Tap a contact name from the list and tap (

Edit

– or –

Press and tap

Edit

– or –

Touch and hold a Contacts entry from the main Contacts list

and then tap

Edit

Create

Contacts

Tabs

Tabbed

Navigation

Contacts Contacts

field

Contacts 127

3. Edit the contact information then:

•

Tap

Save

to complete and store the new entry or

•

Tap

Cancel

to delete the current entry.

Context

128

Adding a Number to an Existing Contact

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Touch and hold an entry and

select

Edit

to reveal the Contact

entry’s details screen.

3. Tap a phone number field and

enter a phone number.

•

Tap on the QWERTY

keyboard to remove a previously

entered phone number.

•

Tap to enter an additional

phone number

•

Tap to remove a previously

entered phone number.

4. Enter additional information

such as:

Address

Events

Groups

Ringtone

Message alert

Vibration pattern

tap

Add another field

to input additional category information.

•Add another field

contains the following options: Phonetic name,

Organization, IM, Notes, Nickname, Website, Internet call, or

Relationship.

•

Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields and

categories.

5. Tap

Save

to complete and store the new entry.

– or –

Tap

Cancel

to delete the current entry.

Contact Details Screen

Contacts 129

Adding a Pause or Wait to an Existing Contact

1. From the Home screen, tap and use the

on-screen keypad to enter a new phone number.

2. Press and then tap

Add 2 sec pause

. This feature adds an

automatic two-second pause.

– or –

Press and then tap

Add wait

. This feature causes the

phone to require your acceptance before sending the next set

of entered digits.

3. Tap

Add to Contacts

➔

Update existing

4. Scroll through the available list of existing entries and select

the desired target.

Note:

This new phone number is then added as a new number to the

selected entry.

5. Tap the label button (to the left of the new phone number) and

scroll through the list to select a category type.

6. Tap

Save

to store and update the entry.

Deleting Contacts

Important!

Once Contacts list entries are deleted, they cannot be

recovered.

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Touch and hold a contact name from the list and select Delete

➔

130

Contact List Options

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Press . The following options display:

• Delete

: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.

•Import/Export

: imports or exports contacts to or from the USB storage

location or SD card, you can also share namecards via methods such as

Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.

• Merge with Samsung account

: allows you to merge all of your current

Contact entries with your active Samsung account. If several of your

contacts are from other external sources, this allows you to “back them

up” or copy them to your Samsung account. Tap

to continue or

Cancel

to exit.

• Merge with Google

: allows you to merge all of your current Contact

entries with your active Google/Gmail account. If several of your contacts

are from other sources such as Corporate email, Internet email,

Facebook, etc.., this allows you to “back them up” or copy them to your

Gmail account. Tap

to continue or

Cancel

to exit.

• Accounts

: allows you to

Auto sync app data

or add and manage

mobile accounts on Samsung account, Google, or Add an account such

as (Samsung account, Email, Facebook, Google, LDAP, or Microsoft

Exchange ActiveSync). This option also allows you to manually

synchronize all of your current contacts with their respective accounts.

• Speed dial setting

: allows you to set up speed-dialing.

• Send email

: allows you to send an email using your Google account.

•Send message

: allows you to send a text or picture message.

Contacts 131

• Contacts to display

: allows you to choose All contacts, Phone,

Samsung account, Gmail, or only display contacts that are part of a

customized list.

• Settings

: provides access to Contacts settings.

Options include: Only contacts with phones, List by, Display contacts by,

Service numbers, and Contact sharing settings.

Contact Menu Options

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Touch and hold an entry to reveal the context menu. The

following options display:

•Edit

: allows you to edit the currently selected Contacts entry.

•Delete

: allows you to delete the currently selected Contacts entry.

•Join contact

: allows you to link the current contact to another current

contact. Similar to a “see also” feature. If you can’t remember a

contact’s information, linking entries can help you find the person you

are looking for.

• Share contact information

: allows you to send the current entry info via

text message.

•Add to Favorites

: allows you to copy the current Contacts entry to the

list within the Favorites tab.

• Remove from favorites

: allows you to remove the current Contacts

entry from the Favorites tab.

• Add to group

: allows you to add the current Contacts entry to an

existing group.

132

• Share namecard via

: allows you to send the current Contact entry’s

information to an external recipient via either

Bluetooth

(Exchange or Internet),

Gmail

Messaging

, or

Wi-Fi Direct

• Print contact info

: allows you to print selected information on a

compatible Samsung printer.

Contact Entry Options

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Tap an entry to reveal the

Contact

entry’s Overview Screen

. This

screen contains Name, contact

numbers, email, and linked

contact information.

3. Press to reveal the context

menu specific to this entry.

4. Tap an available option.

Contact Overview Screen

Contacts 133

Joining Contact Information

Most people now maintain multiple email accounts, social

networking logins, and other similar account information. For

example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a

corporate email account login because they are maintained

separately and for different groups of people.

This device can synchronize with multiple accounts. When you

synchronize your phone with those accounts, each account creates a

separate contact entry in the Contacts list.

If one of your contacts (Amy Smith) has a regular email account that

you maintain in Gmail, but also has a Facebook account under her

maiden and married name, as well as a Video! chat account, when

you merge those accounts into your Contacts list you can join all of

her entries and view the information in one record.

Joining contact information makes sending messages easy. You can

select any account email address or information all from one screen,

versus searching multiple, individual screens to locate the desired

account information.

Next time you synchronize your phone with your accounts, any

updates contacts make to email account names, email addresses,

etc. automatically update in your contacts list.

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to link to another

entry) to reveal the

Contact entry’s Overview Screen

Note:

Typically this is the same contact with a different name or

account information.

134

3. Press and then tap

Join contact

4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to link). The

second contact is now linked with the first and the account

information is merged into one screen.

Note:

The information is still maintained in both entries, but displays

in one record for easier viewing when you link the contacts.

Important!

It is the first contact image that is displayed for both, and

the first contact’s name that is used.

For example: If Amy (original entry) is joined with Julie

(second entry). Julie seems to disappear and only Amy

remains. Tap the Amy entry (showing the Amy image) to

view both.

5. Tap the main linked contact to view the contact information

you linked. The contacts and information displays with an icon

next to the contact name to indicate what type of account

information is contained in the entry.

Contacts 135

Unjoining a Contact

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you want to

unjoin an entry). This reveals the details for entry.

Note:

Typically this is the same contact with a different name or

account information.

3. Tap the

Connection

area.

– or –

Press and then tap

Separate contact

4. Tap next to the entry you want to unjoin and select

The contacts are “unjoined” or separated and no longer

display in the merged record screen. Both contacts now go

back to being separately displayed.

Marking a Contact as Default

When you use applications such as the Voice Dialer or other

messaging type applications, the application needs to know which

information is primary (default) in a contact entry list. For example,

when you say “Call John Smith”, if you have three phone records for

John Smith, the Voice dialer is looking for the “default” number or

entry.

The

Mark as default

option marks one entry in a contact record to

use as the default. This comes in handy when you have multiple

entries for the same person.

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Tap a Contact entry.

136

3. Press and then tap

Mark as default

. The Mark as default

screen displays radio buttons next to the contact name, phone

number, or other contact information.

4. Tap the radio button next to the entry information you want to

be the primary information (such as name, phone number, or

email) and select

Done

Note:

If there are multiple phone numbers assigned to an entry,

assigning one as the default will automatically dial that number

when the contact is selected for dialing.

Sending a Namecard

A Namecard contains contact information, and can be sent to

recipients as a Virtual Business Card (V-card) attachment using

Bluetooth, Google Mail, or as a message.

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Tap a Contact entry.

3. Press and then tap

Share namecard via

and select a

delivery method:

Bluetooth

(Exchange or Internet),

Gmail

Messaging

, or

Wi-Fi Direct

The Namecard attaches to the selected message type and is

delivered when you send the message.

Note:

Email appears as an option only after an Internet or Exchange

email account has been created.

Contacts 137

Sending All Current Namecards

Rather than selecting once Contact entry at a time, you can send all

of your current entries at once.

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Press and then tap

Import/Export

➔

Send namecard via

3. Tap

Select all

to place a check mark alongside all currently

displayed Contact entries.

4. Tap

Done

and select a delivery method:

•Bluetooth

to transmit the contacts to another bluetooth-compatible

device.

•Email

to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing email (Exchange or

Internet).

•Gmail

to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing Internet-based

email.

• Messaging

to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing text message.

Note:

The Web storage Upload feature requires that you are logged

into your Samsung account prior to upload.

• Wi-Fi Direct

to transmit the entries to another Wi-Fi Direct enabled

device.

138

Sending a namecard using Bluetooth

You must create a Contact prior to sending a namecard to a

recipient. For more information, refer to “Creating a Contact” on

page 120.

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Touch and hold the entry to reveal the on-screen context

menu.

3. Tap

Share namecard via

➔

Bluetooth

Important!

You must activate Bluetooth to use this feature.

4. Tap the Bluetooth device in which to send this name card.

Bluetooth forwards the namecard to the recipient.

Copying Contact Information

Copying Contact Information to the microSD Card

This procedure allows you to copy entry information saved on the

phone’s memory, onto the SIM card.

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. From the Contacts List, press and then tap

Import/Export

➔

Export to SD card

3. Tap

to choose all current phone contact entries.

Contacts 139

Synchronizing Contacts

Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you to add and

manage a new or existing contact from your online or remote

accounts to your phone. Prior to syncing, you must first have an

active Google or Microsoft Exchange account with current Contact

entries, and be signed into your account via the phone.

With syncing, any Contacts entries (with phone numbers, email

addresses, pictures, etc.) are updated and synced with your device.

1. From the main

Settings

page and then navigate to the

Accounts

area.

2. Select the email account containing the contacts you wish to

synchronize.

3. Tap within the adjacent account field to reveal the

account’s synchronization settings screen.

4. To synchronize only Contacts, toggle the active state of the

Sync Contacts

field. A green checkmark indicates the feature is

enabled.

Note:

The process of updating your Contacts tab can take several

minutes. If after 10-20 minutes, your list has not been updated,

repeat step 2-3.

5. Your

Contacts

tab then reflects any updated Contact

information.

Note:

Syncing of contacts requires you are logged into your Gmail and

Corporate accounts via the device.

140

Display Options

The Display options menu allows you to allows you to choose which

contacts to display. You can also choose to display only contacts that

have phone numbers.

Note:

Once a display filter has been selected, only those Contact

entries are shown until the

All contacts

option is re-selected.

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Press and then tap

Contacts to display

. Select any of the

following to filter according to the selection:

•All contacts

allows you to display all available Contacts.

•Phone

lists those Contacts currently found only on your Phone.

• Samsung account

lists those Contacts currently found and sync’d

within the Samsung account.

• Google

lists those Contacts currently found within the Google account.

• Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync

lists those Contacts currently found

within the Exchange account.

•Customized list

allows you to enable which account categories are

displayed. For example, on Google contacts, you can filter which Contact

categories are shown (Friends, Family, etc..)

Contacts 141

Adding more Contacts via Accounts and

Sync

When you synchronize applications such as Facebook, Twitter,

MySpace, a corporate email account, or Google, using the Accounts

and sync option synchronizes the data from the selected account

type with your Contacts list.

1. From the main

Settings

page and then navigate to the

Accounts

area.

2. Tap

Add account

3. Determine which type of account information you want to

synchronize with your Contact list. Selections are:

Samsung

account, Email, Facebook, Google, LDAP,

Microsoft Exchange

ActiveSync

4. Tap an account type to add.

5. Follow the prompts. The selected account type synchronizes

with your Contacts list.

6. After synchronizing accounts you may want to link contact

information. For more information, refer to “Joining Contact

Information” on page 133.

142

To add Facebook content to your Contacts list:

You can now add your Facebook contact information, such as

pictures, email, and phone numbers directly to your Contacts list. All

of their current contact information is then migrated over to your

phone. If a Contacts entry already exists with a slightly different

name, separate entries are created and can later be linked (joined)

together into a single entry.

Important!

This process not only synchronizes your contact

information but also your status, events, and more.

1. From the main

Settings

page and then navigate to the

Accounts

area.

2. Tap

Add account

➔

Facebook.

3. You are prompted to download the Facebook application from

the Play Store.

•

Tap

Install

➔

to complete the process.

•

Tap

Open

to launch the application.

4. Log into your Facebook account:

•

Enter your account’s access

and

Password

information and tap

5. If prompted, configure any requested optional permissions and

tap

6. Tap those contact settings you wish to synchronize (all are

enabled by default). A green check mark indicates the feature

is enabled.

•

Choose from:

Sync interval settings

Sync Gallery

, or

Sync calendar

Contacts 143

7. Tap

Done

to complete the login and sync process.

8. Return to the Accounts and sync screen and resync this new

Social Network account.

To resync Social Network Contacts:

1. From the main

Settings

page and then navigate to the

Accounts

area.

2. Tap

Facebook

➔ within the adjacent SNS account field to

reveal the account’s synchronization settings screen.

3. Choose the parameters to sync (ex: Sync Calendar, Sync

Contacts, or Sync Gallery) and tap

Sync now

Note:

From the main Accounts and sync page you can also tap

Sync

all

to resync all accounts.

144

Additional Contact Options

Sending an Email to a Contact

Note:

Contacts must contain and email account and address before

you can use the Send email feature.

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Press and then tap

Send email

. Contacts that contain an

email address display.

3. Tap the contact(s) to which you want to send an email. A check

mark displays next to the selection.

Note:

The select contact must have an email as part of their details

screen.

4. Tap

Done

5. Select an email account type.

6. Compose the email and tap

Send

Export/Import

For more information, refer to “Copying Contact Information” on

page 138.

Contacts 145

Contact List Settings

From this menu you can determine the default storage location for

Contacts, display your phone’s primary number, and view service

numbers listed in your Contact list.

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Press and then tap

Settings

. Configure any of the

following options:

• Only contacts with phones

allows you to display only those contacts

containing phone numbers.

•List by

defines how the current list of Contacts are sorted:

First name

Last name

• Display contacts by

defines how the current list of Contacts are listed:

First name first

(ex: Steve Smith) or

Last name first

(Smith, Steve).

• Contact sharing settings

allows you configure how your Contacts

entries are sent: individually or as a single file containing all available

entries. Tap

Settings

to select a share setting.

–

Send all namecards

allows you to set your Contact sharing option to all

so that your entire Contacts entries are sent as a group and not as

multiple single files. If all your entries are selected only a single file is sent.

Note:

Your destination device must support this feature or no entries

will be received by the external device.

–

Send individual namecards

allows you to set your default to send

individual contacts one at a time. Even if you select all your entries, each is

sent individually.

146

Groups

This feature allows you to add a new or existing contact to a call

group. This group can be one of the already present groups (Family,

Friends, or Work) or a user-created group.

Creating a New Caller Group

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ (

Groups

tab).

2. Press and then tap

Create

3. Tap the

Group name

field and use the on-screen keypad to

enter a new group name. For more information, refer to “Text

Input Methods” on page 104.

4. Tap

Group ringtone

and select a ringtone for the group.

Selections are:

Default, Ringtones

, or

Go to My Files

5. Tap

Vibration pattern

and select a unique vibration pattern to

be associated with this group.

6. Tap

Add member

to then select from a list of available contacts,

tap the contact(s) you want to add, then tap

Done

7. Tap

Save

to store the newly created group.

Note:

Some externally maintained group types (such as Google) can

only be managed or updated remotely online vs via the device.

These external types will not allow editing or deleting members

locally via the phone.

Groups

Contacts 147

Adding an Existing Entry to a Current Caller Group

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ .

2. Tap a group entry ➔ (

Add group member

3. From the available list of contacts, tap the contact(s) you want

to add. A check mark displays next to contact entry.

4. Tap

Done

. The selected contacts are added to the group.

Removing an Entry From a Caller Group

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ .

2. Tap a group entry.

3. Press and then tap

Remove member

4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this group. A

checkmark displays next to contact entry.

5. Tap

Done

.The contacts are removed from the group.

Editing a Caller Group

To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as part of

the selected group.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ .

2. Touch and hold a group entry then select

Edit group

3. Make modifications to the

Group name

Group ringtone

Vibration pattern

, or

Add member

fields.

4. Tap

Save

Groups

148

Deleting a Caller Group

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ .

2. Press and then tap

Delete groups

3. Select either

Select all

or tap the desired group.

4. Tap

Delete

Sending a Message to a Group

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ .

2. Tap an existing group, and press and then tap

Send

message

– or –

Touch and hold a group entry and select

Send message

3. Select the recipients of the new message (indicated by a green

checkmark). If an entry contains multiple phone numbers,

each must be selected individually.

4. Tap

Done

5. Type your message, and tap (

Send

Groups

Contacts 149

The Favorites Tab

The Favorites tab is a list of the phone numbers that have been

designated as favorite contacts. For more information, refer to “Logs

Tab” on page 99.

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Tap (

Favorites

tab).

Adding a contact to your favorites list:

1. From within the Favorites tab, press and select

Add to

favorites

2. Place a check mark alongside those current Contacts entries

you wish to assign as favorites.

3. Tap

Done

to complete the process.

Favorites

150

Section 6: Messages

This section describes how to send or receive different types of

messages. It also explains the features and functionality associated

with messaging.

Types of Messages

Your phone provides the following message types:

•

Text Messages

•

Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages

•

Email and Gmail Messages

•

Hangouts

•

Google+

•

Messenger

The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive text

messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses. To

use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service

provider’s message service.

The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and receive

multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and audio messages)

to and from other mobile phones or email addresses. To use this

feature, you may need to subscribe to your service provider’s

multimedia message service.

Important!

During the creation of a text message, adding an image,

sound file, or video clip automatically changes it from a

text message (SMS) to a multimedia message (MMS).

Messages 151

Message Icons on the Status Bar

Messaging icons are displayed on the Status Bar at the top of the

display when new messages are received. For more information,

refer to “Status Bar” on page 39.

Note:

The Messaging application can also be accessed by pressing

and then tapping (

Apps

) ➔ (

Messaging

Creating and Sending Messages

1. From the Home screen, tap

(

Messaging

) ➔

(

Compose

2. Tap the

Enter recipient

field to manually enter a recipient.

– or –

Tap to select from one of the following:

•Groups

: to select a recipient from the Group list.

•Favorites

: to select a recipient from the Favorites list.

•Contacts

: to select a recipient from your Contacts list (valid entries must

have a wireless phone number or email address).

•Logs

: to select a recipient from a list of recently sent messages.

3. If adding a recipient from these categories, tap the contact to

place a checkmark then tap

Done

. The contact displays in the

recipient field.

Note:

Delete any unnecessary members by tapping their

name/number in the recipient area and selecting

Delete

152

4. Add more recipients by tapping either the

Enter recipient

field

or and selecting recipients.

5. Tap the

Enter message

field and use the on-screen keypad to

enter a message. For more information, refer to “Text Input

Methods” on page 104.

6. Review your message and tap (

Send

7. If you have more than one recipient, the same text message is

sent to all recipients in the Enter Recipients field.

Note:

If you exit a message before you send it, it will be automatically

saved as a draft.

Quick Messaging a Number from the Contacts List

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Contacts

2. Locate an entry from the Contacts list.

3. In a single motion, touch and drag your finger over the number

by going to the left. This action addresses a new text message

to the selected recipient.

Quick

Texting

Calling

Messages 153

Message Options

Options before composing a message

1. From the Home screen, tap

(

Messaging

2. Before composing a message, press from the main

Messaging screen to display additional messaging options:

•Search

: allows you to search through all of your messages for a certain

word or string of words. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or

phrase in which to search, then tap . For more information, refer

“Message Search”

on page 161.

• Delete threads

: allows you to delete any message thread. Select the

messages to delete and a green checkmark will appear next to the

message. Tap Delete. For more information, refer to

“Deleting a

single message thread”

on page 160.

• Draft messages

: displays the draft messages folder and its contents.

• Locked messages

: displays the locked messages folder and its

contents.

• Save messages

: allows you to select available messages for storage

and archiving. Select the desired messages and tap

Save

• Settings

: allows you to access Messaging settings. For more

information, refer to

“Messaging Settings”

on page 161.

• About

: displays information about the messaging application.

154

3. Touch and hold an on-screen message and select an option:

• Add to Contacts

: allows you to add the sender to either a new or

existing Contacts entry.

•View contact

: allows you to view the current entry information for the

sender.

• Delete thread

: deletes the entire message and its bubbles. Deleting a

single message threadFor more information, refer to

“Deleting a

single message bubble”

on page 160.

• Save messages

: allows you to select available messages for storage

and archiving. Select the desired messages and tap

Save

Options while composing a message

1. From the Home screen, tap

(

Messaging

2. From within an open message, press to display

additional messaging options:

•Call

: places an outgoing call to the sender.

• Insert smiley

allows you to add insert smiley icons images (emoticons).

•Add text

allows you to add text items from sources such as:

S Memo, Calendar, Contacts, and Text templates.

•Preview

(only in MMS): allows you to add preview the MMS message

prior to delivery.

• Add to Contacts

: uses the current information to create a new Contacts

entry.

•View contact

: reveals the current Contact’s overview screen.

• Add slide

: converts an SMS message into an MMS (Multimedia)

message and allows you to attach an existing slideshow.

Messages 155

• Delete slide

: allows you to remove a previously attached slideshow.

• Add subject

: allows you to enter a subject.

• Delete subject

: allows you to erase a selected subject.

• Duration (5 sec)

(only in MMS): allows you to change the duration of the

image slideshow.

• Layout (bottom)

(only in MMS): allows you to change the layout.

• Add recipients

: allows you to enter additional recipients to the

message.

• Delete messages

: allows you to erase either select specific message

bubbles or all current messages bubbles.

• Save messages

: allows you to save selected message bubbles.

•Discard

: closes the current open message.

Adding attachments to a message

To add an attachment to your message, tap (

Attach

) and select

one of the following options:

•

Images

: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures list to add

it to your message.

•

Take picture

: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take a photo

with phone’s camera, and then add it to your message by tapping

Save

•

Video

: allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list,

then

add it to your message

•

Capture video

: allows you to temporarily exit the message, record a

video clip using the phone’s camera, and then add it to your message

by tapping

Save

156

•

Audio

: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the Audio list,

then add it to your message by tapping the circle to the right of the

audio so that it turns green, then tapping

•

Record audio

: allows you to temporarily exit the message and record an

audio clip using the phone’s microphone. It is then automatically attached

to the message.

•

S Memo

: allows you to add an S Memo that you have created.

•

Calendar

: allows you to add an event from your calendar.

•

Location

: allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing your

location.

•

Contacts

: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry, then

add it to your message by tapping

Done

Adding Additional Text

You can copy text such as names, phone numbers, and events from

your Contacts, Calendar, or a Memo.

1. While composing a message, press ➔

Add text

2. At the Add text screen, select one of the following:

•S Memo

: allows you to insert text from an existing S Memo.

•Calendar

: allows you to add the name, date, and time of a calendar

event to your message.

•Contacts

: allows you to add the name and phone number of any of your

contacts to your message.

• Text templates

: allows you to add pre-defined phrases and sentences.

For more information, refer to

“Text Templates”

on page 165.

The information is added to your message.

Messages 157

Viewing Newly Received Messages

When you receive a message, your phone notifies you by displaying

within the Notification area at the top left of your Home

screen.

To read a message:

1. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For more

information, refer to “Notification Bar” on page 47.

– or –

From the Home screen, tap

then tap the new message to

view its contents. The selected message displays on the

screen.

2. Tap to play a multimedia message.

•

To pause playback of the multimedia message, tap .

3. In a single motion, touch and drag up or down the page to

scroll through the message (if additional pages were added).

158

Message Threads

Sent and received text and picture

messages are grouped into message

threads. Threaded messages allow

you to see all the messages

exchanged (similar to a chat

program) and displays a contact on

the screen.

Message threads are listed in the

order in which they were received,

with the latest message displayed at

the top.

To reply to a text message:

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. While the message is open, tap

the

Enter message

field and

then type your reply message.

3. Compose your reply.

Your texts are colored Blue and your caller’s replies are Yellow.

4. Tap (

Send

) to deliver your reply.

– or –

Press and then select one of the available message

options (page 153).

Current Recipient My Text

Reply Bubble

Text Message Thread

Messages 159

To access message thread options:



From the main Messaging screen, touch and hold the message

to display the following options:

•View contact

: displays the Contact’s Overview page.

•Add to contact

: begins the process of adding the new number to your

Contacts list.

• Delete thread

: deletes the currently selected message thread.

• Save messages

: allows you to select available messages for storage

and archiving. Select the desired messages and tap

Save

To access additional Bubble options:



Touch and hold the message bubble within an active message

conversation to display the following options:

• Delete message

: deletes the currently selected message bubble from

the thread.

•Copy message text

: copies the currently selected message bubble

from the thread.

• Lock/Unlock message

: locks or unlocks the currently selected

message bubble from being accidentally deleted.

•Forward

: allows you to forward the currently selected message bubble

to an external recipient.

• Save message

: allows you to save a selected message bubble.

• View message details

: displays details for the currently selected

message bubble.

160

Deleting Messages

Deleting a single message thread

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Touch and hold a message from the Messages list, then select

Delete thread

3. At the prompt, tap

to delete or

Cancel

to exit.

Deleting multiple message threads

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Press and then tap

Delete threads

3. Tap each message thread you want to delete. A checkmark

displays beside each selected message.

4. Tap

Delete

5. At the prompt, tap

to delete or

Cancel

to end the process.

Deleting a single message bubble

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Open a message to reveal the message string.

3. Touch and hold a message bubble, then select

Delete message

4. At the prompt, tap

to delete or

Cancel

to exit.

Deleting multiple message bubbles

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Open a message to reveal the message string.

3. Press and then tap

Delete messages

4. Place a check mark on the individual bubbles targeted for

deletion or choose Select all.

Messages 161

5. Tap

Delete

to erase or

Cancel

to exit.

Message Search

You can search through your messages by using the Message

Search feature.

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Press and then tap

3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in which

to search, then tap .

4. All messages that contain the entered search string display.

Messaging Settings

To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia messages,

Voice mails, and Push messages.

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Press and then tap

Settings

The following Messaging settings are available:

Display

• Bubble style

: allows you to choose from several bubble styles for your

messages. Bubbles are the rounded boxes that surround each

message.

• Background style

: allows you to choose from several background styles

for your messages.

• Use the volume key

: allows you to change the text size by using the up

or down volume keys.

162

General settings

• Restore messages

: restores previous saved messages to your inbox.

• Delete old messages

: deletes old messages when the limit is reached,

rather than overwriting them.

• Text message limit

: allows you to set a limit on how many text

messages are allowed in one conversation.

• Multimedia message limit

: allows you to set a limit on how many

multimedia messages are allowed in one conversation.

• Text templates

: provides access to the text templates.

Text message (SMS) settings

•Auto combination

: when this option is activated, multi-segment

messages are re-assembled show they can be shown as a single

message.

Multimedia message (MMS) settings

•Auto-retrieve

: allows the message system to automatically retrieve

messages.

•MMS alert

: alerts you when the messaging modes changes from an

SMS (text) to MMS (multimedia) mode.

• Group conversations

: when this option is activated, the device sends

messages as a group conversation.

Notification settings

• Notifications

: allows you to see message notifications on your status

bar.

• Select ringtone

: allows you to set the ringtone for your message

notifications.

Messages 163

•Vibrate

: allows you to configure the vibration mode associated with

message alerts.

• Message alert repetition

: allows you to set the interval for new

message alerts. Choose from: Once, Every 2 minutes, or Every

10 minutes.

• Preview message

: when enabled, allows you to view a brief preview of

new message text on the Status bar.

Emergency message settings

• Emergency alerts

: allows you to configure emergency alert settings.

You can enable/disable those alert categories you wish to receive.

Choose from: Imminent extreme alerts, Imminent severe alert, and

AMBER alerts.

Note:

The Presidential alert can not be disabled.

• Emergency notification preview

: allows you to play a sample

emergency alert tone. Tap

Stop

to cancel the playback.

•Vibrate

: when enabled, this activates vibration for emergency alert

notification.

• Alert reminder

: when activated, sets the alert reminder interval. Choose

from: Once, Every 2 minutes, Every 15 minutes, or Off.

Signature settings

• Add signature

: when enabled, this feature allows you to create a

signature at the end of your outgoing text messages.

• Signature text

: allows you to enter a desired signature for your

message.

164

Emergency Alert Configuration

This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from

the Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS); which may also be

known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network (PLAN). If your

wireless provider has chosen to participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are

available while in the provider's coverage area. If you travel outside

your provider's coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be

available. For more information, please contact your wireless

provider.

Emergency Alerts allows customers to receive

geographically-targeted messages. Alert messages are provided by

the US Department of Homeland Security and will alert customers of

imminent threats to their safety within their area. There is no charge

for receiving an Emergency Alert message.

There are three types of Emergency Alerts:

•

Alerts issued by the President

•

Alerts involving imminent threats to safety of life

•

AMBER Alerts (missing child alert)

Customers may choose not to receive Extreme Alerts, Severe Alerts,

and AMBER Alerts.

Important!

Alerts issued by the President can not be disabled.

To disable Extreme, Severe, and AMBER Alerts:

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Press and then tap

Settings

3. Scroll to the bottom and select

Emergency alerts

. All alerts are

enabled by default (checkmark showing).

Messages 165

4. Tap on an alert option to disable the alert and remove the

checkmark.

Text Templates

This screen displays your available text message reply templates.

This is a readily accessible list of both default and user-defined text

snippets that can be used to quickly reply to incoming messages.

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. From the Messaging list, press and then tap

Settings

➔

Text templates

3. Tap a message to immediately insert it into your current

message conversation.

To create your own text template:

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. From the Messaging list, press and then tap

Settings

➔

Text templates

3. Tap (

Create text template

4. Enter a new text string and tap

Save

166

Using Email

Email (or Internet Email) enables you to review and create email

using several email services. You can also receive text message

alerts when you receive an important email. Your phone’s Email

application lets you access and manage multiple email accounts

simultaneously in one convenient location.

There are currently three main types of email accounts on your

phone: Gmail, Internet-based email (Gmail, Yahoo, etc..), and

Microsoft Exchange (Corporate email or Outlook®).

To send and receive email messages through an ISP (Internet

Service Provider) account, or if you wish to use your device to access

your corporate email through a VPN (Virtual Private Network), you

will first need to set up an IMAP or POP account.

•

IMAP

(Internet Message Access Protocol) - This protocol is frequently

used in large networks and commercial settings. IMAP4 is the current

standard.

•

POP3

(Post Office Protocol) - This protocol is supported by most ISPs

(Internet service providers) and common among consumer applications.

POP3 is the current standard.

•

Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync

- This protocol is frequently used with a

large corporate email server system and provides access to email,

contact, and calendar synchronization.

Messages 167

Creating an Internet Email Account

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

2. If you already have other email account setup:

•

Open an existing email account, press and then tap

Settings

➔

(

Add new account

– or –

Enter your

Email address

and

Password

information.

• Email address

: your Internet email address.

• Password

: typically your network access password

(case-sensitive).

3. Tap

Show password

to display the password as you enter it in

the associated field.

•

Tap

Manual setup

to configure your connection settings manually

(POP3 or IMAP). Follow the on-screen prompts and enter the information

specific to your email provider.

4. Tap

5. At the Account options screen, select the frequency which the

device should check for new email on the server and tap

•

Tap the

Notify me when email arrives

field to receive new email

notifications.

•

Tap the

Automatically download attachments when connected to

Wi-Fi

field to assist with faster access to large email attachments when

using Wi-Fi.

6. At the

Set up email

screen, name the account and enter a

screen name to identify yourself on this account.

168

•

The unique account name is used to differentiate this account from

other email accounts accessed by your device.

7. Tap

Done

to store the new account.

Messages for this account display on the Inbox tab. You can also

view Personal information for this account, Receipts (if you setup the

account to return receipts), Travel information, and more (if

available).

Opening an Email

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ (

2. Tap the account name field (upper-left) to open the complete

email account list page.

•

Selecting

Combined view

allows you to view all the emails for your

current accounts, managed by the application, to be listed on a single

screen.

3. Select an email account and tap an email message.

Refreshing Email messages

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ (

2. Select an email account.

•

If you are already in an email account, tap the account name field

(upper-left) to open the complete email account list page.

•

Select an available email account.

3. Tap (

Refresh

Messages 169

Composing Email

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ (

2. Tap the account name field (upper-right) to open the complete

email account list page.

3. Tap

Inbox

➔ (

Compose

4. Enter the recipient’s email address in the

field.

•

If you are sending the email message to several recipients, separate the

email addresses with a comma. You can add as many message

recipients as you want.

5. Press and then tap

Add Cc/Bcc

to add additional carbon

copy recipients.

•

Use the

field to carbon copy additional recipients.

•

Use the

Bcc

field to blind copy additional recipients.

6. Tap the

Subject

field and enter the email subject.

7. Tap the email text field and compose your email message.

•

To add an attachment (such as image, video, audio, etc..),

tap

Attach

(from the top of the screen) and make a category

selection.

–

Tap the file you wish to attach.

–

Tap

to delete the attached file.

Note:

If you attach an image to your email, you have the option to

resize it prior to delivery. Choose from: Original,

Large (70%), Medium (30%), or Small (10%). Once chosen, tap

8. Once complete, tap (

Send

170

Configuring Email Settings

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ (

2. Select an account.

3. Press and then tap

Settings

➔

4. Alter any of the following settings:

• Account name

: displays your uniquely created account display name.

•Your name

: displays the name used in the From field of your outgoing

email messages.

•Signature

: Lets you attach a customized signature to the bottom of all

outgoing emails.

–

In a single motion touch and slide the

Signature

slider to the right to turn

it on.

–

Tap the

Signature

field, change the current text, and tap

to save the

new signature.

• Default account

: Assign this account as the default email account used

for outgoing messages.

• Always Cc/Bcc myself

allows you to include your own email address in

either the CC, Bcc, or None fields. Lets you always receive a copy of

outgoing emails.

• Forward with attachment

: Lets you include attachments when

forwarding an email.

• Recent messages

: adjusts the number of on-screen messages shown

in the current category list at any one time.

•Show images

: allows you to view embedded images located within the

body of the currently displayed email.

Messages 171

• Sync Email

: enables automatic email synching between your device

and the remote server.

• Auto download attachments

: allows the device to automatically

download email attachments when an active Wi-Fi connection is

detected. This process speeds up the process of downloading an emails

attachments for offline review by not using a 3G or 4G network

connection.

• Size to retrieve emails

: configures the incoming email size allowed to

pass through to your phone automatically without user interaction.

Emails with attachments larger than configured will have to be retrieved

manually.

• Auto resend times

: enables the device to resend an outgoing email a

specified number of times if delivery fails.

• Sync schedule

: allows you to control the email sync schedule on both

Peak and Off-Peak times.

• Email notifications

: Activates the email notification icon to appear

within the Notifications area of the status bar when a new email (Gmail,

etc..) is received.

• Select ringtone

: Plays a selected ringtone when a new email message

is received.

•Vibrate

: Activates a vibration when a new email message is received.

• Incoming settings

: Lets you specify incoming email settings, such as

User name, Password, IMAP server, Security type, Port, and IMAP path

prefix.

172

• Outgoing settings

: Lets you specify outgoing email settings, such as

SMTP server, Security type, Port, Require sign-in, User name, or

Password.

Note:

Some the above options may not be displayed when using some

Internet account types.

Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook)

Your phone also provides access to your company’s Outlook

Exchange server. If your company uses either Microsoft Exchange

Server 2003 or 2007, you can use this email application to

wirelessly synchronize your email, Contacts, and Calendar

information directly with your company’s Exchange server.

Setting Up a Microsoft Exchange Email account

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ (

2. If you already have other email account setup:

•

Open an existing email account, press and then tap

Settings

➔

(

Add new account

– or –

Enter your

Email address

and

Password

information.

• Email address

: your Outlook work email address.

• Password

: typically your network access password (case-sensitive).

3. Tap

Send email from this account by default

, to make this your

default email account for outbound emails.

4. Tap

Show password

to display the password as you enter it in

the associated field.

Messages 173

Note:

If selected, the

Manual setup

button changes to read

Microsoft

Exchange ActiveSync

. If activated, skip to step 6.

5. Tap

. Consult your Network or IT Administrator for further

details and support.

6. Tap

Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync

(from the add new email

account screen).

Note:

If prompted with an on-screen notification that the connection

that the “Setup could not finish”, tap

Edit details

to continue

with a manual update of necessary information.

7. When prompted to provide additional detailed information

within the Exchange server settings screen, enter an updated

Domain

, and confirm your

user name

and

Password

information.

Important!

Remember to manually place the cursor in the correct spot

and enter a Domain name before the “

[Domain]\[user

name]

” entry. Most servers only provide a username.

8. Update or re-enter your

Exchange server

information within the

appropriate field. This field can often be populated with

incorrect or out of date information provided by your server.

• Exchange Server

: your exchange server remote email address.

Typically starts with

mail.XXX.com

. Obtain this information from your

company network administrator.

174

Important!

Do not accept the default entry as this is a guess based on

returned information.

•

If your network requires SSL encryption, tap the

Use secure connection

(SSL)

field to place a check mark in the box and activate this additional

level. Most often, this option should be enabled.

•

If your network requires that you accept SSL certificates, tap the

all SSL certificates

field to place a check mark in the box and activate

this additional level. Most often, this option is not required. Confirm this

information with your IT Administrator.

Important!

If your Exchange server requires this feature, leaving this

field unchecked can prevent connection.

9. Consult your IT Administrator if it is necessary to enable the

Use client certification

option.

10. With the new server information entered, tap

11. Read the on-screen

Activation disclaimer

and, when prompted,

tap

. The device then verifies your incoming server settings.

12. If prompted, read the

Remote security administration

information and tap

to accept the service and continue.

13. Adjust the various on-screen configuration fields and tap

It may take a few seconds for the next screen to load.

•

Enabling the

Automatically download attachments when

connected to Wi-Fi

option decreases the wait time to access large

email attachments.

Messages 175

14. If prompted, read the

Activate device administrator?

screen and

tap

Activate

to complete the email setup process.

Note:

This process can take a few minutes. If the previous setup

screen re-appears,

ignore it and do not alter any fields

during

this process.

15. Identify your new work email account with a unique name

(Ex: Work), then tap

Done

Opening an Exchange Email

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ (

2. Tap the account name field (upper-left) to open the complete

email account list page.

3. Select an exchange email account and tap an email message.

Refreshing Exchange Email

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ (

2. Select an email account.

•

If you are already in an email account, tap the account name field

(upper-left) to open the complete email account list page.

•

Select an available email account.

3. Tap (

Refresh

Composing Exchange Email



For more information, refer to “Composing Email” on

page 169.

176

Deleting an Exchange Email Message



Touch and hold an email (from your inbox list) and select

Delete

from the on-screen context menu.

– or –

With the email message displayed, tap (

Delete

Configuring Microsoft Exchange Email Settings

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

and

then navigate to the

Accounts

area.

2. Tap the Microsoft Exchange account and

Settings

➔

Exchange email account

– or –

From the current Email inbox listing, press and then tap

Settings

➔ <

Exchange email account

and specify the email

settings you wish to synchronize:

• Account name

displays the name used by the device to track the

account.

•Signature

: Lets you attach a customized signature to the bottom of all

outgoing emails.

–

In a single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on.

–

Tap the

Signature

field, change the current text, and tap

Done

to save

the new signature.

• Default account

: Assign this account as the default email account used

for outgoing messages.

Messages 177

• Always Cc/Bcc myself

allows you to include your own email address in

either the CC, Bcc, or None fields. Lets you always receive a copy of

outgoing emails.

• Forward with attachment

: Lets you include attachments when

forwarding an email.

•Show images

: allows you to view embedded images located within the

body of the currently displayed email.

• Auto download attachments

: allows the device to automatically

download email attachments when an active Wi-Fi connection is

detected. This process speeds up the process of downloading an emails

attachments for offline review by not using a 3G or 4G network

connection.

• Period to sync Email

to assign the sync range for your incoming and

outgoing email messages between your phone and your external

exchange server. How many days worth of email messages should the

phone and server synchronize. Choose from:

Automatic, All, 1 day

3 days

1 week

2 weeks

, or

1 month

• Empty server trash

: allows you to delete your email account’s trash bin

remotely.

• Sync schedule

allows you to configure your email sync schedule.

• Folder sync settings

allows you to configure the sync settings for

various folders such as Inbox, Drafts, Outbox, etc..

• Out of office settings

allows you to both activate/deactivate your email’s

out of office settings, and configure both the start/end dates and your

outgoing message.

178

• Size to retrieve emails

configures the incoming email size allowed to

pass through to your phone automatically without user interaction.

Emails with attachments larger than configured will have to be retrieved

manually.

• Period to sync Calendar

assigns a period for your phone to sync

calendar events. Choose from:

2 weeks, 1 month

3 months

6 months

, or

All calendar

• Security options

: allows you to enable several security options such as:

Encryption, Encryption algorithm, Sign, Sign algorithms, Email

certificates, and Security policy list. These security policies could restrict

some functions from corporate servers.

–

Security policy list

: lists the current email’s security policy. These

policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers.

• In case of sync conflict

allows you to assign the master source on

emails. If there is a conflict with the current email sync you can assign

the server as the main source for all emails (

Server has priority

) or

assign the phone to be the main source and update the server

accordingly (

Device has priority

• Auto resend times

enables the phone to resend an outgoing email a

specified number of times if delivery fails.

• Email notifications

enables the phone to display a status bar icon when

new email messages have been received.

• Select ringtone

assigns an audible ringtone when a new or upcoming

event is pending.

•Vibrate

assigns a vibration when a new or upcoming event is pending.

Messages 179

• Exchange server settings

provides access to the Domain\user name,

Password, and Exchange server settings.

• Sync Email

synchronizes emails between your device and the remote

exchange server.

•Sync Contacts

synchronizes the contacts between your device and the

remote exchange server.

•Sync Calendar

synchronizes your exchange calendar entries between

your device and the remote exchange server.

• Sync Task

synchronizes your exchange tasks entries between your

device and the remote exchange server.

3. Press to return to the previous page.

Using Google Mail

Google Mail (Gmail) is Google’s web-based email. When you first

setup the phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the

synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized with

your Gmail account.

Signing into Google Mail

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ (

Gmail

Note:

You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to access

features such as Google Mail and Play Store.

2. Tap

New

if you do not have a Google account.

– or –

Tap

Existing

if you have a Google account.

The Inbox loads conversations and email.

180

Opening Gmail

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ (

Gmail

2. Tap an existing email message.

Refreshing Gmail Mail



From within the Gmail message list, tap

Gmail

(

Refresh

)

at the bottom of the screen to refresh the screen, send and

receive new emails, and synchronize your email with the Gmail

account.

Other Gmail Options

1. From the main Gmail Inbox screen, tap (

Labels

) at the

bottom of the screen to set up and manage Labels for your

Gmail messages.

2. From the main Gmail Inbox screen, tap (

) at the

bottom of the screen to search through your Gmail messages.

Composing a Gmail Message

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ (

Gmail

2. From the Gmail Inbox, tap (

Compose

) at the bottom of

the screen to create a new message.

3. Enter the recipients Email address in the

field.

Tip:

Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a comma.

4. Press and select

Add Cc/Bcc

to add a carbon or blind

copy.

5. Enter the subject of this message in the

Subject

field.

Messages 181

6. Tap the

Compose email

field and begin composing your

message.

7. Once complete tap (

Send

Viewing a Gmail Message

1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view the following

options located at the bottom of the screen:

•Archive

: archives the selected Email.

• Delete

: deletes the currently selected Email.

•Labels

: assigns a label to the current Email.

• Mark as Unread

: tags the current message as unread and returns

you to the Google Mail Inbox.

•Newer

: swiping to the right displays newer Emails.

•Older

: swiping to the left displays older Emails.

2. From within the active Gmail message, press to select

one of the following additional options:

• Mark important/Mark not important

: assigns the current email an

important status.

•Mute

: mutes the conversation.

•Report spam

: reports the Email message as spam.

• Report phishing

: reports the Email message as a phishing email

attempt.

• Settings

: allows you to configure the General, or Notification settings.

• Send feedback

: sends feedback to Google.

•Help

: launches the browser and displays Google Mobile Help

information.

182

Creating an Additional Gmail Account

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ (

Gmail

2. Press and then tap

Settings

➔

ADD ACCOUNT

and follow

the same steps as referenced in the previous section. For more

information, refer to “Signing into Google Mail” on page 179.

Hangouts

Previously known as Google Talk™, is an updated place to hangout,

share photos, and even video calls. This is a free Windows and web-

based application for instant messaging offered by Google.

Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats area in your

Gmail account. This allows you to search a chat log and store them

in your Gmail accounts.

Note:

Before using this application, you must first have an active

Gmail account available and be currently logged in.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ (

Hangouts

Note:

If you are not already logged into Google, refer to the

instructions for signing in on page 179.

2. When prompted, read the on-screen information and confirm

your phone number is correct before using the application. Tap

Confirm

Note:

Confirming your phone number does not make it publicly

available.

Messages 183

Google +

Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot

easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream to get

updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast messaging with

everyone in your Circles, or use Instant Upload to automatically

upload videos and photos to your own private album on Google+.

1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information, refer to

“Creating a New Google Account” on page 22.

2. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

) ➔ (

Google+

3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google+.

– or –

Tap

Add account

to create another account.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+.

5. Visit

www.google.com/mobile/+/

for more information.

Messenger

Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into a

simple group conversation. When you get a new conversation in

Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your device.

1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information, refer to

“Creating a New Google Account” on page 22.

2. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

) ➔ (

Messenger

– or –

From the Google+ application, select

Messenger

184

3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google+.

– or –

Tap

Add account

to create another account.

4. When prompted, follow the on-screen procedures to configure

the Sync contacts parameters.

5. When prompted, configure the photo backup parameters as

desired and tap

Done

6. Tap from the upper-left of the screen and select from an

available list of features such as: Find People, Communities,

Hangouts, etc..

To create a new message:

1. Tap from the upper-left of the screen and select

Messenger

2. Tap to start a new message.

3. In the upper text field, enter a name, email address, or circle.

4. In the bottom

Type a message

field, enter a message then tap

(

Send

Multimedia 185

Section 7: Multimedia

This section explains how to use the multimedia features of your

device, including the Camera/Camcorder, Music Player, Samsung

Link, and how to manage your photos, images and sounds.

You can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-in

camera functionality. Your camera produces photos in JPEG format.

Important!

Do not take photos of people without their permission.

Do not take photos in places where cameras are not

allowed.

Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with

another person’s privacy.

Note:

An SD card is no longer needed to take pictures or shoot video

since there is already built-in storage.

Assigning the Default Storage Location

Important!

Too many users can overlook this storage location until

something goes wrong. It is recommended that you verify

this location or change it before initiating the use of the

camera or camcorder features.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Camera

2. From the viewfinder screen, tap (

Settings

) and scroll up

to the

Storage

entry.

186

3. Tap this entry and select the desired default storage location

for newly taken pictures or videos. Choose from:

Phone

Memory card

Note:

It is recommended that you insert an external microSD card and

then set the option to

Memory card

4. Press to return to the Home screen.

Using the Camera

Taking Photos

Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as simple as

choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then pressing the camera

key.

Note:

When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions,

shadows may appear on the photo.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Camera

2. Using the device’s main display screen as a viewfinder, adjust

the image by aiming the camera at the subject.

Note:

Use either the Up and Down volume keys or spread/pinch the

screen to zoom in or out. For more information, refer to

“Navigating Through the Screens” on page 55.

3. If desired, before taking the photo, use the left area of the

screen to access various camera options and settings.

Multimedia 187

4. You can also tap the screen to move the focus to a desired area

of interest.

5. Press (

Camera

) until the shutter sounds. (The picture is

automatically stored within your designated storage location

(page 185). If no microSD is installed, all pictures are stored on

the Phone.) For more information, refer to “Camera Options”

on page 188.

Note:

Touch and hold to take a burst shot. These are saved using

a Fine image quality.

Focus areaSelf-portrait

Flash

Shooting

mode

Settings

Effects Camera/Camcorder

Image viewer

button

Camera/Camcorder

mode

Storage/Charge

188

Camera Options

Options are represented by icons across both sides of the screen.

The following shortcuts are available for the camera:

Focus area

: displays the area of the image used as the

main focus area.

If the image is too close, the square will turn red.

Self portrait

: allows you to set the front camera so you

can take pictures of yourself.

Flash

: allows you to set the flash options to Off, On, or Auto

flash.

Shooting mode

: allows you to set the shooting mode to

one of the following:

•

Single shot

: takes a single photo and view it before

returning to the shooting mode.

•

Best photo

: takes a series of photographs

simultaneously, then allows you to cycle through the

available thumbnails and choose the best photo to keep.

Tap

Done

to select the photo.

•

Best face

: takes a series of photographs simultaneously,

then allows you to cycle through the available

thumbnails and choose the best photo showing the

subject’s best face. Tag subject from the image, tap a

desired image, and select

Save

to store the photo.

Multimedia 189

Shooting mode (continued):

•

Face detection

: adjusts the camera focus based on face

detection technology.

•

Panorama

: takes a landscape photo by taking an initial

photo and then adding additional images to itself. The

guide box lets you view the area where the second part

of the panoramic picture should fall within.

•

Share shot

: uses Wi-Fi Direct to share your pictures

quickly with your friends. For more information, refer to

“Enabling Share Shot” on page 198.

•

HDR

: takes pictures in HDR (High Dynamic Range) mode

to increase image detail.

•

Buddy photo share

: uses face recognition from pictures

in your contacts to send your friends or family pictures

of themselves.

•

Beauty

: adjusts the contrast to smooth facial features.

•

Smile shot

: the camera focuses on the face of your

subject. Once the camera detects the person’s smile, it

takes the picture.

•

Low light

: adjusts the aperture and light settings to take

better images in low light conditions.

Effects

: allows you to change the color tone or apply

special effects to the photo. Options include:

No effect, Cold vintage, Warm vintage, Posterize, Solarize,

Green point, Blue Point, Red-yellow point, Washed out,

Cartoonify, Black and white, Sepia, or Negative.

190

Share shot - Share with

: lists the current participants

sharing images with you via an active Share shot

session.

Share shot - Shooting mode

: denotes the current shooting

mode is set to the Share Shot mode.

Settings:

Edit shortcuts

: allows you to set shortcut icons for the

settings that you use the most.

Burst shot

: allows several photographs to be captured in

quick succession by touching and holding the Camera

button.

GPS tag

: allows you to turn GPS On or Off (also known as

Geo-tagging). The location of where the picture

is taken is attached to the picture.

Self-portrait

: allows you to set the front camera so you can

take pictures of yourself or video chat.

Flash

: allows you to set the flash options to Off, On, or

Auto flash.

Shooting mode

: allows you to set the shooting mode. For

more information, see Shooting mode description.

Multimedia 191

Settings (continued):

Effects

: allows you to change the color tone or apply

special effects to the photo. Options include:

No effect, Cold vintage, Warm vintage, Posterize, Solarize,

Green point, Blue point, Red-yellow point, Washed out,

Cartoonify, Black and white, Sepia, and Negative.

Scene mode

: allows you to set the Scene to help take the

best pictures possible. Options include None, Portrait,

Landscape, Sports, Party/Indoor, Beach/Snow, Sunset,

Dawn, Fall Color, Text, or Candlelight. Helpful tips are shown

for each scene mode at the bottom of the display screen.

Exposure value

: allows you to adjust the brightness level

by moving the slider.

Focus mode

: allows you to set this option to Auto focus or

Macro. Use Auto focus for all other focal situations.

Timer

: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait

before taking a picture. Options include: Off, 2 sec,

5 sec, and 10 sec.

192

Settings (continued):

Resolution

: allows you to set the image size to either:

8M (3264x2448), W6M (3264x1836), 3.2M (2048x1536),

W2.4M (2048x1152), W0.9M (1280x720), or 0.3M

(640x480).

White balance

: allows you to set this option to one of the

following choices: Auto, Daylight, Cloudy, Incandescent,

or Fluorescent.

ISO

: ISO determines how sensitive the light meter is on

your digital camera. Choose from Auto, 100, 200, 400,

or 800. Use a lower ISO number to make your camera

less sensitive to light, a higher ISO number to take

photos with less light, or Auto to let the camera

automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots.

Metering

: allows you to set how the camera measures or

meters the light source: Matrix, Center-weighted, or Spot.

Auto contrast

: provides a clear image even under backlight

circumstances where intensity of illumination can vary

excessively.

Guidelines

: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off.

Multimedia 193

Settings (continued):

Auto share shot

: when used in conjunction with

S Beam, allows you to quickly share images with others.

Anti-Shake

: compensates for camera movement.

Contextual filename

: (requires GPS tagging) allows you

to adjust the filename based on contextual information

such as your current GPS location.

Image quality

: allows you to set the image quality to:

Superfine, Fine, or Normal.

Storage

: allows you to configure the default storage

location for images or videos as either Phone or Memory

card (if inserted).

Reset

: allows you to reset all camera or camcorder

settings to the default values.

Image viewer

: allows you to access the Image viewer

and the various viewing options for a selected picture.

The last picture you took, will be displayed as a

thumbnail in the Image viewer icon.

Camera button

: takes a photo when pressed in Camera mode.

194

Adding a Name tag to an image

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Camera

2. Press (

Camera

) until the shutter sounds.

3. Tap the Image viewer to view the image.

4. Tap a face on the image, tap the on-screen square and select

Add name

5. Select an entry from your existing list of Contacts entries. An

on-screen bubble confirms the name was added.

Camera Mode

: allows you to take a photo in various modes.

Once you change the mode, the corresponding indicator

appears at the top left of the display. Slide the button up

for Camera, or down for Camcorder.

Storage location/Connection Status

: indicates the device

is connected to an adapter and the current storage

location for images (Phone or Memory card)

on the device.

Multimedia 195

Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options

After you take a photo or record a video, you can access various

options.

Photo viewing options

1. Tap a thumbnail to view the picture.

Note:

If no control icons are displayed on the screen in addition to the

picture, tap anywhere on the screen to display them.

2. The following options are available at the top of the screen:

•Favorites

allows you to assign the current image as a favorite.

•Share via

: allows you to share the picture via Bluetooth, Email,

Gmail, Google+, Group Play, Hangouts, Messaging, Picasa, S Memo, or

Wi-Fi Direct.

• Delete

: allows you to delete the current picture.

3. Press for additional options such as:

–

Slideshow

allows you to see your photos in a slideshow.

–

Face tag

allows you to activate/deactivate face recognition for use

with external social media applications.

–

Tag buddy

allows you to assign tags to a subject in an image. These

tags are selected by the user on the Tag buddy menu that appears

once the feature is selected. Choose from: Weather, Location, Person,

or Date.

Note:

The Tag buddy - Date information is displayed only when other

tags are shown.

196

–

Add/Edit weather tag

: allows you to edit an existing or assign a new

weather tag that is then saved to the current file.

–

Copy to clipboard

allows you to copy one or more pictures to a different

folder.

–

Rotate left

: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a

counterclockwise direction.

–

Rotate right

: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a

clockwise direction.

–

Crop

: provides an on-screen box that allows you to crop the current

picture. Tap

Done

to update the image with the new dimensions or tap

Cancel

to ignore any changes.

–

Set as

: allows you to assign the current image as a Contact photo, Home

screen, Lock screen, or Home and lock screens.

–

Buddy photo share

: allows you to share the current image with active

buddies.

–

: allows you to print the current image on a compatible Samsung

printer.

–

Rename

: allows you to rename the current file.

–

Scan for nearby devices

: scans for nearby DLNA-compliant devices

that can receive or display the current image.

–

Details

: files details such as Title, Type, Time, Album, Size, Reolution,

etc..

Multimedia 197

Video viewing options

Note:

If no control icons are displayed on the screen in addition to the

picture, tap anywhere on the screen to display them.

1. Tap a video to select it.

2. Tap to play the video.

3. Press for additional options.

Sharing Pictures

Pictures are the best way of remembering the moment, but an even

better treat is to share them with others.

Two new features allow you to either instantly share a series of

pictures as they are taken or quickly share a picture without using

email or messaging.

•

Share Shot

is a great way to instantly share a series of pictures among a

group of users. The best example for this feature is having multiple users

instantly sharing each others pictures at a company or family gathering.

As each person takes a separate picture with their own device, they are all

pooled together and instantly appear in each user’s Gallery.

No more “Email your pictures to me later”. Each person walks out of the

event with all the pictures taken by everyone.

This method of image transfer requires that both devices have Wi-Fi Direct

active and be paired prior to use.

Note:

You can only share a shot with other external users who also

have their Wi-Fi Direct feature active.

198

•

S Beam Transfer

uses the NFC (near Field Communication) feature found

on your device to transmit large files directly to another compatible device

direct touch

This method of image transfer requires NFC and S Beam to be enabled

prior to use.

For more information, refer to

“Using S Beam to Share Pictures”

page 201.

Enabling Share Shot

Share shot is a Wi-Fi Direct group sharing feature where multiple

users can Wi-Fi connect their devices and then all share each others

pictures in real-time. This is really useful in group events (ex: family

gathering or company party) where you don’t want to have to email

everyone later and make sure you all can share your pics at a later

date.

For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi Direct Setup and Settings” on

page 326.

The general process is:

•

Enable Wi-Fi Direct communication

•

Pair your device with other users

•

Enable Share shot

To enable Wi-Fi Direct:

1. From the main

Settings

page, in a single motion touch and

slide the

Wi-Fi

slider to the right to turn it on. The slider color

indicates the activation status.

2. Tap

Wi-Fi

➔

Wi-Fi Direct

Multimedia 199

3. Tap

Scan

and select the single device name to begin the

connection process to another Wi-Fi Direct compatible device.

– or –

Tap

Multi-connect

➔

Scan

and select all the device names to

begin the connection process to these Wi-Fi Direct compatible

devices.

Note:

The target device must also have Wi-Fi Direct service active and

running before it can be detected by your device.

4. Tap

Done

. The direct connection is then established. Confirm

appears in the Status bar.

5. When prompted to complete the connection, the recipient

should tap

. Your status field now reads “Connected” and

your connected device is listed within the Wi-Fi Direct devices

listing.

6. Each partner (including yourself) must then tap

consent to the new Wi-Fi Direct pairing.

To enable Share shot on Camera:

1. From the Home screen, tap

(

Camera

) ➔

(

Shooting

Mode

) ➔

Share shot

2. If you are prompted to activate your Wi-Fi Direct connection,

tap

and follow the activation procedures for Wi-Fi Direct.

200

To configure your Share Shot options:

1. Confirm the Share Shot viewfinder is active (see below).

2. Confirm the Wi-Fi is actively sharing icon ( ) appears at the

top of the viewfinder window.

3. Tap (

Share profiles with

) to display list of current

participants.

•

Stop sharing images with select participants by tapping their entry and

removing the green check mark.

4. Tap (

Shooting modes

) to display list of currently available

shooting modes from within Share Shot.

5. Tap (

Settings

) to disable share shot while maintaining a

Wi-Fi Direct connection.

To take share shot images:

1. Press (

Camera

key) until the shutter sounds.

2. From the recipients’ device, navigate to the (

Gallery

) to

locate your newly shot images located in their default storage

location.

•

External users will be able to locate their images in either a downloaded

RECV

(received) folder.

3. Confirm (

Share shot images delivered/received

) appears

in the recipients’ Notifications area of the screen.

Multimedia 201

Using S Beam to Share Pictures

This feature (when activated via NFC) allows you to beam large files

directly to another compatible device that is in direct contact. These

files can be larger, such as Videos, HD pictures, and other large

files.You can beam images and videos from your gallery, music files

from your music player, and more.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

More settings

2. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide the

NFC

slider to the right to turn it on.

3. Tap

S Beam

and make sure the feature is turned on.

4. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide the

S Beam

slider to the right to turn it on.

5. On the source device (containing the desired image or video),

tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Gallery

6. Locate and tap the selected image to open it in the preview

window.

Important!

Neither device must be in Lock mode or displaying the

Lock screen. They must both be active and unlocked. It is

recommended that the target device be on the Home

screen.

202

7. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back to

begin (1).

Note:

If the

Touch to beam

screen does not appear on the source

device:

- Pull them apart

- Verify the image is visible in the preview window on

the source device (providing the file)

- Place them together again

8. From the

Touch to beam

screen, tap the reduced image

preview to begin the transfer (2). After a few seconds

(depending on file size) the recipient with then see the

transferred file displayed on their screen.

Place device atop each other

Tap the source image

Multimedia 203

To share multiple pictures via S Beam:

1. On the source device (containing the desired image or video),

tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Gallery

2. Locate the selected folder.

3. Touch and hold the first image and place a checkmark on it

and all desired images.

4. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back to

begin.

5. From the

Touch to beam

screen, tap the reduced image

preview to begin the transfer (2).

6. When prompted, separate the two devices.

Camera Gallery Options

The Gallery is where you can access the Gallery of stored camera

images.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Gallery

2. Select a folder location (ex:

Camera

) and tap an image to open

it.

– or –

Touch and hold an image to place a checkmark on the file and

select multiple files.

– or –

Tap the upper-right camera to begin taking pictures that are

placed in this folder.

204

3. Tap the on-screen image and use either of the following image

menu options:

•Favorites

allows you to assign the current image as a favorite.

•Share via

: allows you to share the picture via Bluetooth, Email,

Gmail, Google+, Group Play, Hangouts, Messaging, Picasa, S Memo, or

Wi-Fi Direct.

–

Group Play

: allows to share images directly with other Wi-Fi

connected participants via Group Play.

• Delete

: allows you to delete the current picture.

4. Press to select additional options:

–

Slideshow

allows you to see your files in a slideshow.

–

Face tag

allows you to activate/deactivate face recognition for use

with external social media applications.

–

Tag buddy

allows you to assign tags to a subject in an image. These

tags are selected by the user on the Tag buddy menu that appears

once the feature is selected. Choose from: Weather, Location, Person,

or Date.

Note:

The Tag buddy - Date information is displayed only when other

tags are shown.

–

Add/Edit weather tag

: allows you to edit an existing or assign a new

weather tag that is then saved to the current file.

–

Copy to clipboard

: allows you to copy one or more pictures to a different

folder.

Multimedia 205

–

Rotate left

: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a

counterclockwise direction.

–

Rotate right

: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a

clockwise direction.

–

Crop

: provides an on-screen box that allows you to crop the current

picture. Tap

Done

to update the image with the new dimensions or tap

Cancel

to ignore any changes.

–

Set as

: allows you to assign the current image as a Contact photo, Home

screen, Lock screen, and Home and lock screens.

–

Buddy photo share

: allows you to share the current image with active

buddies.

–

: allows you to print the current image on a compatible Samsung

printer.

–

Rename

: allows you to rename the current file.

–

Scan for nearby devices

: allows you to look for DLNA -compliant

devices used to control streaming media.

–

Details

: files details such as Title, Type, Time, Time, Album, Size,

Reolution, etc..

206

Screen Sharing an Image via Group Play

Important!

Verify all of your recipients are connected to the same

Wi-Fi.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Gallery

2. Open an image and tap ➔ (

Group Play

)

3. Enter a security PIN and tap

Done

. This process makes sure

only desired recipients can view your shared image.

4. Recipients must launch Group Play on their devices. Your

device then waits for other connected recipients on the same

Wi-Fi network to accept the connection and enter the PIN on

their screens.

5. Other users will have to activate their Group Play functionality

and then select the current Group and enter the correct PIN

code.

You can now interact and draw with the on-screen image, users will

instantaneously see the same gestures and also be able to interact.

Note:

The newly altered image (with markups and comments) can not

be saved, but you can take a screen shot of the current image

and save it to your Clipboard.

For more information, refer to “Using Gestures” on page 58.

Multimedia 207

Taking a Screen Shot

Also known as a screen capture, this feature allows you to mimic the

print screen function on most computers.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Motion

2. Tap the desired on-screen motion option.

3. In a single motion touch and slide the

Motion

slider to the right

to turn it on.

4. Tap the desired on-screen motion option.

5. Although enabled by default, enable the

Palm swipe to capture

field by placing a check mark in the adjacent field.

6. With the current screen showing the desired image, in a single

motion, place the side of your palm along the one side of the

device and then slowly swipe it in the opposite direction over

the screen.

Assigning an Image as a Contact Photo

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Gallery

2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.

3. With the image displayed, press and then tap

Set as

➔

Contact photo

4. Tap a contact to make a selection.

5. Use the on-screen crop the image by dragging it around or out

from its corners.

6. Tap

Done

to store the new image.

208

Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Gallery

2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.

3. With the image displayed, press and then tap

Set as

4. Select one of the these options:

• Home screen

assigns the current image to the home screen

background. This image is spread across all available screens.

•Lock screen

assigns the selected image to the background for the lock

screen.

• Home and lock screens

assigns the current image to both the Home

screen and Lock screens.

5. Touch and drag the crop box anywhere on the picture. Touch

and drag the sides of the crop box to zoom in or out to create a

cropped area.

6. Tap

Done

to assign the wallpaper image.

– or –

Tap

Cancel

to stop without updating the wallpaper image.

Multimedia 209

Using the Camcorder

In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a camcorder

that also allows you to record, view, and send high definition videos.

Shooting Video

Tip:

When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, it is

recommended that you provide your subject with sufficient light

by having the light source behind you.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Camera

) to

activate the camera mode.

2. Tap and slide the Camera mode button down to

Camcorder

Mode.

3. Using the device’s main display screen as a viewfinder, adjust

the image by aiming the camcorder at the subject.

Note:

Use either the Up and Down volume keys or spread/pinch the

screen to zoom in or out. For more information, refer to

“Navigating Through the Screens” on page 55.

4. Tap the Video key ( ) to begin shooting video. The red light

will blink while recording.

5. Tap anywhere on the screen to re-focus the camera on that

object. The camcorder auto-focuses on the new target area.

6. Tap the screen then select to turn on auto focus. This will

automatically focus the video based on the object at the middle

of the screen.

210

7. To capture an image from the video while recording, tap .

This feature is not available while the anti-shake feature is

activated.

8. Tap the Stop key ( ) to stop the recording and save the

video file to your Camera folder.

– or –

Tap the Pause key ( ) to pause the recording.

9. Once the file has been saved, tap the image viewer, then tap

(

Play

) to playback your video for review.

10. Press to return to the viewer.

Camcorder Options

You can change options using your keypad in capture mode. The

following short cuts are available:

Self portrait

: allows you to activate the front facing camera

so you can take videos of yourself or video chat.

Flash

: allows you to set the flash options to Off or On.

When you set the flash to On, it stays on continually while

you are taking a video.

Recording mode

: allows you to set the recording mode to:

Normal, which is limited only by available space on the

destination location, Limit for MMS, which is limited by

MMS size restrictions.

Multimedia 211

Effects

: allows you to change the color tone or apply

special effects to the video. Options include: No effect,

Cold vintage, Warm vintage, Posterize, Solarize, Green point,

Blue point, Red-yellow point, Washed out, Cartoonify,

Black and white, Sepia, or Negative.

Settings:

Edit shortcuts

: allows you to set shortcut icons for the

settings that you use the most.

GPS tag

: allows you to turn GPS On or Off (also

known as Geo-tagging). The location of where the video

is shot is attached to the file.

Self-recording

: allows you to set the front camera so you

can take videos of yourself or video chat.

Flash

: allows you to set the flash options to Off or On. When

you set the flash to On, it stays on continually while you

are taking a video.

Recording mode

: allows you to set the recording

mode to:

•

Normal

: is limited only by available space on the

destination location.

•

Limit for MMS

: is limited by MMS size restrictions.

212

Settings (continued):

Effects

: allows you to change the color tone or apply special

effects to the video. Options include:

No effect, Cold vintage, Warm vintage, Posterize, Solarize,

Green point, Blue point, Red-yellow point, Washed out,

Cartoonify, Black and white, Sepia, or Negative.

Exposure value

: allows you to adjust the brightness level by

moving the slider.

Timer

: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait

before taking a video. Options include: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, and

10 sec.

Resolution

: allows you to set the image size to either:

1920x1080, 1280x720, 720x480, 640x480, or 320x240.

White balance

: allows you to set this option to one of the

following choices: Auto, Daylight, Cloudy, Incandescent, or

Fluorescent.

Guidelines

: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off.

Anti-Shake

: reduces image blur due to the movement of

the subject of the video or hand movement.

Contextual filename

: (requires GPS tagging) allows you to

adjust the filename based on contextual information such

as your current GPS location.

Multimedia 213

Settings (continued):

Video quality

: allows you to set the image quality to:

Superfine, Fine, or Normal.

Storage

: allows you to configure the default storage location

for images or videos as either Phone or Memory card (if

inserted).

Reset

: allows you to reset all camera or camcorder settings

to the default values.

Image viewer

: allows you to access the Image viewer and

the various viewing options for a selected video. Image

viewer options are described in the following section.

The last video you took, will be displayed as a thumbnail

in the Image viewer icon.

Camcorder button

: shoots or stops video recording when

pressed in Camcorder mode.

Live Shooting

: takes a photo during a video recording

session in Camcorder mode.

Note:

This feature is not functional when the Anti-Shake

feature is activated.

214

Accessing Videos

When you shoot a video, the file is saved in the Camera folder. You

can view your videos immediately or view them anytime in the

Camera folder.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Gallery

2. Select a folder location and tap a video icon to begin video

playback.

– or –

Touch and hold the video icon from the main Gallery to select

the video (indicated by a colored border) and display the

following video menu context options:

•Favorites

allows you to assign the current video as a favorite.

•Share via

: allows you to share the video via Bluetooth, Email,

Gmail, Google+, Messaging, Picasa, Wi-Fi Direct, and YouTube.

• Delete

: allows you to delete the current video. Choose either OK

or Cancel.

Camcorder Mode

: allows you to shoot video.

Slide the button up for Camera mode or down for Camcorder

mode.

Storage location/Connection Status

: indicates the device

is connected to an adapter and the current storage location

for videos (Phone or Memory card) on the device.

Multimedia 215

3. From within the Gallery, place a checkmark on the video and

press for additional options such as:

–

Slideshow

allows you to see your files in a slideshow.

–

Tag buddy

allows you to assign tags to a subject in a video. These

tags are selected by the user on the Tag buddy menu that appears

once the feature is selected. Choose from: Weather, Location, Person,

or Date.

Note:

The Tag buddy - Date information is displayed only when other

tags are shown.

–

Rename

: allows you to rename the current file.

–

Scan for nearby devices

: allows you to look for DLNA -compliant

devices used to control streaming media.

–

Details

: files details such as Title, Time, Width, Height, Orientation, File

Size, and Path.

216

The Gallery

The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For

photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a slideshow,

set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as a picture

message.

Note:

If the phone displays a memory full message when accessing

the Gallery, access

Files

and remove some of the media files

from the folders, and then open the Gallery.

Opening the Gallery



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Gallery

). For

more information, refer to “Camera Gallery Options” on

page 203.

Note:

If you stored your files in folders (directories) on the storage

card, Gallery displays these folders as separate albums. The top

left album contains all the pictures in the storage card.

Viewing a Video within the Gallery

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Gallery

2. Locate your folder and video.

3. Tap (

Play

) to playback your video.

For more information on using the Picture-in-Picture feature for

video playback, see “Using Picture-In-Picture” on page 218.

Multimedia 217

Using the Video Player

The Video Player application plays video files stored on the SD card. This

device is able to playback DivX videos.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Video Player

). A list of available videos displays in the

Video list.

2. Tap a video file to begin viewing.

Sharing Videos

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Video Player

). After a few seconds, each

on-screen video begins to cycle through a preview of the first

five seconds of the clip.

2. Press and then tap

Share via

3. Select either individual videos or tap

Select all

4. Click

Done

to complete the process or

Cancel

to quit.

5. Select a sharing option. Choose from: Bluetooth, Email, Gmail,

Google+, Messaging, Picassa, Wi-Fi Direct, and YouTube.

218

Using Picture-In-Picture

This feature can be used during playback of supported video types

via either the Gallery, Play Videos, or Video player.

Note:

Some applications might not allow this video to remain active in

the foreground (ex: Camera/Camcorder screen).

This feature allows you to continue to view your video as a

background operation while you multi-task and do other things, such

as surf the Internet, access your Contacts list, look for a picture, etc..

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

2. Tap the desired video playback application (ex: Video Player).

3. Tap the desired video to begin playback.

Note:

The Picture-In-Picture feature only works when using the Video

player application. Other video players (ex: YouTube), do not

support this feature.

4. As playback is initiated, locate and tap

(

Picture-in-Picture

) from the bottom-right of the playback

screen. Your current video is then sent to foreground of any

new page and most application screens.

5. The video disappears from the screen once it ends.

Multimedia 219

DivX Overview

This device is able to playback DivX videos. DivX Certified® to play

DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content. If you try to

play DivX VOD content not authorized for your device, the message

“Authorization Error” will be displayed and your content will not play.

Learn more at

www.divx.com/vod

Your device must first be registered to playback protected or

purchased DivX content. DRM-free or unprotected content does not

required DivX VOD registration.

Locating Your VOD Registration Number

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

➔

About device

➔

Legal information

➔

License settings

➔

DivX®

VOD

➔

2. Write down your Registration code.

3. Tap

220

Purchased Movies

To play purchased DivX movies on your device, you will first need to

complete a one-time registration using both your device and your

computer.

1. Write down the DivX registration code that appears

on-screen. Copy this 8 or 10-digit number down.

2. Verify you have the latest DivX software running on your

computer. Download the free player (for your computer) from

www.divx.com

3. Open the DivX Player on your computer and from within the

VOD

menu, select

4. You are prompted to log in or create a DivX account if your

account information has not already been saved in DivX Player.

5. Follow the instructions in DivX Player to enter the registration

code from step 2 and create a device nickname (ex: “Pat or

Pat’s Device”).

6. Select a location on your computer to download the DivX

registration video with the same title as your device nickname

(ex: Pat.divx).

7. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the file and

initiate the transfer process. You will need to place this video

file onto your device and play it back.

8. Connect your device to the computer via USB and transfer this

video.

Multimedia 221

9. From the

Registration

screen (Transfer), click Transfer Video

now and select the location of the microSD card or

USB

(the

device) as the target destination for the registration video

(created in step 6) and click

Start

– or –

Locate the created file, copy and paste it into the new drive

letter corresponding to your device’s storage location.

10. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

My Files

11. Locate your registration DivX video file and tap the file to play

it. Once you play the registration file on your device, your

registration is complete.

12. Return to the DivX VOD Manager screen (from within your

computer’s DivX Player) and confirm both your computer and

your new device appears in the list of registered DivX devices.

Important!

There is no special registration or configuration necessary

to playback DRM-free DivX movies. Registration of your

device is only required for playback of protected DivX

material.

222

Play Movies & TV

This application allows you to connect to the Play Store, download a

movie and then watch it instantly.

Choose from thousands of movies, including new releases and

HD titles in the Play Store and stream them instantly on your Android

device.

Movies, previously rented via the Play Store are automatically added to

your My Movies library across your devices.

Learn more about Google Play Movies at:

http://play.google.com/about/movies

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Play Movies & TV

2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already done so.

A list of videos sorted on the SD card displays in the Video list.

3. Following the on-screen instructions for renting and viewing

movies.

4. Tap the

MOVIES

tab to view movies you have rented.

5. Tap the

TV SHOWS

tab to view shows you have rented.

6. Tap the

PERSONAL VIDEOS

tab to view movies you have on your

device or memory card.

For more information on using the Picture-in-Picture feature for

video playback, see “Using Picture-In-Picture” on page 218.

Multimedia 223

Play Music

Also known as Google Music, allows you to browse, shop, and

playback songs purchased from the Play Store. The music you

choose is automatically stored in your Google Music library and

instantly ready to play or download.



Access the new music tab from within your Play Store

application.

The Music application contains a music player that plays

music and

other audio files that you copy from your computer.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Play Music

The Music app searches both your online library and your

device’s internal storage for music and playlists; this can take

from a few seconds to several minutes, depending on the

amount of new music added since you last opened the

application. It then displays a carousel view of your new and

recent music, organized by album.

2. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to link your

current account to Google Play Music.

3. Tap an on-screen account to add it or select

Add account

use a new account.

4. At the free songs screen, select either

Get free songs

Skip

•

Get free songs are downloaded via either the Internet or Play Store.

•

Follow the on-screen download and installation instructions.

5. Swipe left or right to browse through your new and available

music. Music, albums, and artists are grouped into categories.

6. Tap an on-screen album to open it and begin playback.

224

7. Return to the Library screen from most other screens in the

Music application by tapping the Music application icon

(

Music notification icon

) at the top-left of the Application bar.

Changing Library View

You can change the way you view the contents of your library.

1. From the main

Play Music

page, and while in a selection or

screen, tap (near the top-left of the Application bar) or

scroll left/right across the top of the screen to make a

selection.

2. Available tabs include:

PLAYLISTS

RECENT, ARTISTS

ALBUMS

SONGS

, or

GENRES

Note:

The contents of your library display in a scrolling grid or list

view, depending on the view.

Multimedia 225

Searching for Music in Your Library

1. From the main

Play Music

page, tap (

) to search

through your available songs.

2. Type the name of an artist, album, song, or playlist.

Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search box.

3. Tap a matching song to play it, tap a matching album, artist or

playlist to view a list of its’ songs.

Changing Music Settings



From the main

Play Music

page, press and then make a

selection.

• Choose on device music

: In addition to playing the music that you add

to your online library, you can play music stored on your device’s internal

storage. Then you can listen to music when you have no Internet

connection. To do this, make some of your online music available offline.

For more information, refer to

“Making Online Music Available

Offline”

on page 230.

• Settings

: Provides access to the Play Music settings.

•Help

: Displays application help information.

Listening to Music

You can listen to music by using your device’s built-in speakers,

through a wired headset, or through a wireless Bluetooth stereo

headset.

Press the volume keys on the side of the device to activate

on-screen volume control, then touch and drag on the scale to set

volume.

226

Playing Music



From the main

Play Music

page, tap a song in your library to

listen to it.

The

Now playing

screen opens and the song you touched or the

first song in the album or playlist starts to play. The tracks in

the current list play in order until you reach the end of the list

(unless you choose a repeat option). Otherwise, playback stops

only if you stop it, even when you switch applications.

Note:

If you navigate away from the

Now playing

screen in the Music

application, the Now Playing bar appears at the bottom of the

screen.

Multimedia 227

Displaying the Now Playing Screen

If you navigate away from the

Now playing

screen, to return to the

Now playing

screen from other Music screens:



Tap the name of the current song in the bottom Now Playing

bar.

– or –

If you have left the Play music app, in a single motion, touch

and drag (

Music notification icon

) down from the Status

bar, then tap the song title from the Notifications area. You can

also pause and resume playback and skip to the next song in

the panel. For more information, refer to “Notification Bar” on

page 47.

Tab Options

There are various options available from the various tabs:



From the main

Play Music

page, select one of the following

tabs and tap to access an available option.

•PLAYLISTS:

Add to queue, Rename, or Delete.

•RECENT:

to display the most recently played songs and albums

•ARTISTS:

Add to queue, Add to playlist, or Shop for artist.

•ALBUMS:

Add to queue, Add to playlist, More by artist, or Shop for artist.

• SONGS:

Add to queue, Add to playlist, Shop for artist, or Delete.

•GENRES:

Add to queue, Add to playlist, More by artist, or Shop for artist.

228

Options While Playing a Song

When you play a song, the

Now playing

screen displays. There are

various options and controls available while a song is playing:

1. From the main

Play Music

page, tap an album or song.

2. From the Now playing screen, press (

) to display the

following options:

• Equalizer

: applies selected equalizer features such as:

FX booster, Bass boost, and 3D effect.

•Clear queue

: clears the current queue.

• Save queue

: stores the current queue.

• Settings

: Allows you to view and assign various music settings, and

view different application-specific information.

•Help

: Provides an on-screen series of related help topics.

3. Tap ➔

Add to playlist

to add the song to a playlist.

– or –

Tap ➔ ➔

Add to playlist

to add the song to a

playlist.

The

Now playing

screen contains several buttons that you can tap to

control the playback of songs, albums, and playlists:

Tap to go back to the previous song. Touch and hold to

scan backward through the current song.

Tap to resume playback.

Tap to pause playback.

Multimedia 229

Creating a Playlist

1. From the main

Play Music

page, tap an album or song list and

play a song.

2. From the Now Playing screen, tap ➔ adjacent to

the song name and select

Add to playlist

3. Tap

New playlist

➔

Playlist name

field to enter a name for the

playlist.

4. Tap

to save the new playlist.

Tap to advance to the next song. Touch and hold to scan

forward through the current song.

When Shuffle mode is enabled via

Show Options

, songs

play in random order. When disabled

(as shown), songs play in the order they appear

in List view.

When Shuffle mode is enabled via

Show Options

, songs

play in random order. When enabled, songs play in

random order.

Tap one of the icons shown here to either:

repeat the current song, repeat all songs, or disable

repeat mode.

230

Adding Songs to Playlists

1. From the main

Play Music

page, tap an album or song list and

play a song.

2. From the Now Playing screen, tapap ➔ adjacent to

the song name and select

Add to playlist

3. Select the desired target playlist.

Playing a Playlist

1. From the main

Play Music

page, select the

PLAYLISTS

tab.

2. Tap a playlist title and select and entry from the list to begin

playback.

Deleting a Playlist

1. From the main

Play Music

page, and display the

PLAYLISTS

library view.

2. Tap next to a playlist title and tap

Delete

Making Online Music Available Offline

In addition to playing the music that you add to your online library,

you can play music stored on your device’s internal storage. Then

you can listen to music when you have no Internet connection. To do

this, make some of your online music available offline.

Tip:

You can also copy music directly from your computer to your

device.

Multimedia 231

To make your online music available offline on your device:

1. From the main

Play Music

page, change your library view to

Albums, Artists, or playlists.

2. Press and then select

Choose on device music

and tap the

album or playlist you want to make available offline.

A blue pin indicates that the item is already available

offline.

Darker pins appear next to the items you can make available

offline. A bar at the bottom of the screen shows how much

space is available on your device for music and other files.

Dim blue pins indicate songs or albums that you copied

directly from a computer to your device.

3. Tap the dark pin next to each item you want to make available

offline or tap a blue pin to stop making it available offline. You

can switch to other views of your library to make other kinds of

items available offline as well.

4. Tap

Done

in the bar at the bottom of the screen.

5. The Music application starts downloading the items to your

device.

232

Music Player

The Music Player is an application that can play music files. The

music player supports files with extensions AAC, AAC+, eAAC+,

MP3, WMA, 3GP, MP4, and M4A. Launching the Music Player allows

you to navigate through your music library, play songs, and create

playlists (music files bigger than 300 KB are displayed).

Playing Music

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Music Player

2. Tap a library category tab to select the music category:

All

Playlists

Albums

Artists

Music square

, or

Folders

3. Scroll through the list and tap an entry to begin playback.

Note:

The 5.1 channel sound effect works when earphones or sound

is connected through the headset jack only.

4. Use any of the following Music Player controls:

Pause the song.

Start the song after pausing.

Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to

previous song.

Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to

go to next song.

Volume control.

Plays the entire song list once.

Multimedia 233

Making a Song a Phone Ringtone

1. From the main

Music Player

page, tap the

All

tab.

2. Touch and hold a song from the list to reveal the on-screen

context menu.

3. Tap

Set as

➔

Phone ringtone.

Music Player Options

The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set preferences for

the music player such as whether you want the music to play in the

background, sound effects, and how the music menu displays.



With the Music player application displayed and playing a

song, press and select one of the following options:

• Add to quick list

: adds the current music file to the Quick list.

• Via Bluetooth

: scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth headset.

•Share via

: allows you to share your music by using Bluetooth, Email,

Gmail, Group Play, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.

Replays the current list when the list ends.

Repeats the currently playing song.

Shuffles the current list of songs randomly.

Songs play in order and are not shuffled.

Provides access to the Music square.

Lists the current playlist songs

Displays the current song in the player window

Provides access to the Equalizer

234

• Add to playlist:

allows you to add the current music file to a selected

playlist.

•Details

: allows you to view media info such as Artist, Title, Album, Track

length, Genre, Track number, Format, Size, and Location.

•Set as

: allows you to set the current song as a Phone ringtone, Caller

ringtone, or Alarm tone.

• Scan for nearby devices

: allows you to look for DLNA -compliant

devices used to control streaming media.

• Settings

: allows you to change your music player settings.

•End

: closes the application.

Music Player Settings

The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set preferences for

the music player such as whether you want the music to play in the

background, sound effects, and how the music menu displays.

1. From the main

Music Player

page, press ➔

Settings

2. Select one of the following settings:

• SoundAlive

: set a type of equalization such as Normal, Pop, Rock,

Dance, Jazz, Classic, etc.

• Play speed

: set the play speed anywhere between 0.5X and 2.0X using

the slider.

•Music menu

: this menu allows you to select which categories you want

to display. Choices are: Albums, Artists, Genres, Music square, Folders,

Composers, Years, Most played, Recently played, or Recently added.

Tap each item that you want to display in the Music menu.

•Lyrics

: when activated, the lyrics of the song are displayed if available.

Multimedia 235

• Music auto off

: when activated, music will automatically turn off after a

set interval.

Using Playlists

Playlists are used to assign music files into groups for playback.

These Playlists can be created using the Music player on this device,

or using a third-party application (such as Windows Media Player)

and downloading those files to an SD card inserted into the device.

Creating a Playlist

1. From the main

Music Player

page, tap the

Playlists

tab.

2. Press and then tap

Create playlist

3. Backspace over the default playlist title and type a new name

for this playlist, then tap

Adding Music to a Playlist

1. From the main

Music Player

page, tap the

Playlists

tab.

2. Tap the playlist name in which to add music.

3. Press and then tap

Add

– or –

Tap (

Add music

). This option is available within

user-created playlists.

Note:

If a playlist is empty, add a song by touching a holding a song

name from the main screen to open the context menu. Select

Add to playlist

and choose the playlist.

4. Tap a music file, or tap

Select all

to add all the music tracks to

this playlist then tap

Done

236

Removing Music from a Playlist

1. From the main

Music Player

page, tap the

Playlists

tab.

2. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.

3. Touch and hold a song to reveal the on-screen context menu.

4. Tap

Remove

Editing a Playlist

Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you can also

share, delete, or rename the playlist.

Note:

Only those playlist you have created can be edited. Default

playlists can not be renamed.

1. From the main

Music Player

page, tap the

Playlists

tab.

2. Touch and hold a playlist entry to reveal the on-screen context

menu.

3. Tap

Edit title

4. Enter a new name for this playlist and tap

Transferring Music Files

Music files can be downloaded to the phone using one of two

methods:

1. Downloaded to the device from the Play Store.

Music files are directly stored on your phone.

2. Downloaded to the phone via a direct USB connection.

Music files are stored into a Music folder on the SD card.

Multimedia 237

Removing Music Files

1. From the main

Music Player

page, tap the

All

tab.

2. Touch and hold a song entry to reveal the on-screen context

menu.

3. Tap

Delete

➔

OK.

The music file(s) is deleted.

Samsung Link

This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung device with

your TV, streams content and even keeps tabs on who calls or sends

text messages with real-time, on-screen monitoring. Samsung’s

Link makes staying connected easy.

Allows users to share their in-device media content with other

external devices using DLNA certified™ (Digital Living Network

Alliance) Devices. These external devices must also be DLNA-

compliant. Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a digital

multimedia streamer.

Important!

You must first connect both of your communicating devices

to the same Wi-Fi and be using an active/registered

Samsung account prior to using this application.

For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi settings” on

page 321.

For more information, refer to “Creating a Samsung

Account” on page 25.

Note:

For more information on defining the various feature definitions,

see page 285.

238

Important!

The Samsung account manages the access information

(username/password) to several applications, such as

Samsung Link, Chat On, and Samsung Hub.

1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung account.

There should be no icon in the Notifications area of the

screen.

2. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Samsung Link

3. If prompted with an on-screen notification about no Wi-Fi

detected, tap

Cancel

(to continue by using your network

connection) or

Connect

to continue.

4. Tap

5. If prompted to log into your Samsung account, tap

and

follow the on-screen instructions.

Note:

If the main screen still shows a Sign in box, close the application

and restart it.

6. Follow the on-screen prompts.

•

Scroll across the application screen to view either

MY RECENT CONTENT

DEVICES & STORAGE

The DEVICES & STORAGE screen contains two separate streaming

media options:

•Registered storage

: allows you to receive and playback media stored

externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on your device by allowing you to

add a Web storage service for streaming content.

Multimedia 239

• Registered devices

allows you to stream/share selected multimedia

content from your device to DLNA compliant device connected to the

same Wireless Access Point.

Configuring Samsung Link Settings

The Samsung Link™ application must first be configured prior to its

initial use. You must setup parameters such as connected Wi-Fi,

Items to share, source server address, and external device

acceptance rights.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Samsung Link

) ➔

DEVICES & STORAGE

2. Press and then tap

Settings

and configure the following

settings as desired:

•Registered storage

: allows you to add a Web storage location. Without

a storage service/location added, you will not be able to use Samsung

Link.

• My device

: displays your device name as it is used with Samsung Link.

Tap to change the device name.

•Save to

: allows you to save your media to your internal phone memory

or to an SD card.

•Auto upload

: allows you to enable automatic upload of images from

your device to those storage locations specified within the Web storage

list. Move the slider to the on position to activate the feature.

• Video optimization

: allows you to setup the video quality for streamed

video content. Move the slider to the on position to activate the feature.

240

• Password lock

: allows you to restrict access to Samsung Link by

requiring a user enter the currently active and associated Samsung

account password. Move the slider to the on position to activate the

feature.

• My account

: displays Samsung account information.

• Customer support

: allows you to contact the Samsung Link team via a

new email from an available email account.

• About this service

: displays application information.

Setting Up Web Storage

Web storage services allow you to use storage space to store your

files and share them on the “Cloud”.

Note:

If you are using another Web storage service, log into that

service first before using Samsung Link.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Samsung Link

) ➔

DEVICES & STORAGE

Note:

When adding storage, an N Drive is added.

2. If not already signed into your Cloud storage, tap

(

) ➔

to your desired service. Choose

from: SugarSync, Dropbox, or SkyDrive.

– or –

Press and then tap

Settings

➔

Registered storage

➔

(

Multimedia 241

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to register or log into your

cloud service.

4. Once the process is successfully completed, the Web storage

icon or name appears in the Web storage area of the main

screen.

5. From the main screen, select a connected device and then tap

on the media that you would like to share.

•

A file with in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely on a Web

storage location. Selecting this media causes your device to access the

file currently stored on your services’ servers.

To de-register Web storage service:

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Samsung Link

) ➔

DEVICES & STORAGE

Press and then tap

Settings

➔

Registered storage

➔

Deregister

2. Select a current storage service and tap

Sharing Media via Samsung Link to a Target Device

Important!

Make sure all communicating devices are connected to the

same Wi-Fi.

1. Launch AllShare Play/Samsung Link on the target device (such

as an Internet TV, Samsung Tablet, etc..).

2. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Samsung Link

242

Note:

You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before you can

use this feature.

3. Tap your device name from the

Registered devices

area.

4. Tap an available category tab (Pictures, Music, Movies, or

Files) and select a file.

•

Touch and hold to select multiple files.

•

A file with in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely on a Web

storage location. Selecting this media causes your device to access the

file currently stored on your services’ servers.

5. Tap an available on-screen file, image, or video to place a

green check mark alongside it.

6. Tap (

Stream to connected devices

) from the bottom of the

screen.

7. Tap an available on-screen file, image, or video to select it and

then select an available target device to begin streaming.

8. On a target device (ex: Internet TV) select the

on-screen

Allow

button to continue.

Note:

At this stage your device is requesting access to share media

with the external source.

9. Confirm (

Nearby devices

) appears in the Notification

area at the top of the device to indicate you are using your

device as the media source.

Multimedia 243

AllShare Cast Hub

This hardware allows you to enjoy what’s currently on your device

directly on your TV.

Note:

There is no need to be connected to a Wi-Fi network or to be

logged into your Samsung Account to use this feature.

AllShare Cast Hub establishes a WI-Fi Direct connection

between the device and the hub

Connecting AllShare Cast Hub

To connect your AllShare Cast Hub hardware:

AllShare Cast

(with

Hub accessory)

This feature functions with an

external AllShareCast Hub to fully

mirror what is currently displayed on your

device to the external TV.

AllShare Cast Hub

HDMI Travel Adapter (Power)

Status LED

RESET button

244

1. Connect the AllShare Cast hub to a power source via the USB

Travel Adapter.

Note:

The status LED begins to blink solid red to indicate it has begun

the start up process.

2. Connect your TV to the AllShare Cast Hub via an HDMI cable

(A-to-A cable) as shown above.

3. Change the source input on your TV to match the input port

used by the incoming HDMI cable.

Note:

The television screen should now display an on-screen tutorial

showing you how to configure your device’s AllShare Cast Hub

and device settings.

LED Color/Patterns Description

Red - Solid

Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is booting or

processing.

Red - Blinking

Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is in standby

mode (ready for connection).

Blue - Solid

Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is ready to be

connected with a new device.

Multimedia 245

To activate AllShare Cast on your device:

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

➔

More settings

➔

AllShare Cast

2. If not already on, touch and slide the

AllShare Cast

slider to the

right to turn it on. The slider color indicates the activation

status.

Pairing AllShare Cast Hub

To pair your device and Hub for the 1st time:

1. Locate the AllShare Hub (dongle) name displayed at the bottom

of the TV (showing the tutorial). Ex: Name:

Dongle - XXXXXX

2. Access your device’s

AllShare Cast

screen and locate the same

hub/dongle name in the list.

•

Tap

Scan

if your AllShare Cast Hub (dongle) does not appear in the list.

3. Verify your AllShare Cast Hub is on (blinking red LED) and the

on-screen tutorial is displaying on the connected TV.

Note:

The AllShare Cast Hub communicates with your paired device

via a Wi-Fi Direct connection.

4. For a first time connection:

•

Press the

RESET

button (located at the rear of the hub) once and only for

a second until the LED turns solid

BLUE

•

Quickly tap the hub name entry on your device’s AllShare Cast screen.

5. Verify (

AllShare Cast Hub Communicating

) appears at the

top of the device’s screen.

246

6. Confirm the connection by making sure both your TV and

device show the same image/screen and (

Wi-Fi Direct

Communicating

) now displays on the device.

Important!

The AllShare Cast Hub is a 1-to-1 connection. If a previous

device was paired to the Hub and is still connected to the

AllShare Cast Hub, you can not pair a new device until the

first connection is stopped.

To disconnect your device from the hub:

1. Access your device’s

AllShare Cast

screen and locate the

current connection.

2. Tap the entry and select

End connection

To reconnect your device again to an existing hub:

1. Locate the AllShare Hub (dongle) name displayed at the bottom

of the TV (showing the tutorial). Ex: Name:

Dongle - XXXXXX

Important!

Verify the LED is not a solid blue. This indicates there is

another device currently connected.

2. Access your device’s

AllShare Cast

screen and tap the same

hub/dongle name in the list.

3. Confirm the connection by making sure both your TV and

device show the same image/screen.

Multimedia 247

YouTube

YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload and

share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

YouTube

2. When the screen loads you can begin searching and viewing

posted videos.

3. Press ➔

Settings

➔

General

➔

High quality on mobile

you prefer high quality output.

248

Section 8: Applications and

Development

This section contains a description of each application that is

available in the Applications Menu, its function, and how to navigate

through that particular application. If the application is already

described in another section of this user manual, then a cross

reference to that particular section is provided.

Note:

This manual only addresses applications that have been loaded

on your [device/computer/tablet] as of the date of purchase.

Information concerning third party applications that you may

choose to download from the Google Play Store or otherwise

should be obtained from the application provider directly.

Tip:

To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-used

applications to one of the Home screens. For more information,

refer to “Customizing the Screens” on page 71.

You can also add an application icon as a Primary Shortcut that

will display on all Home screens. If you add an application as a

primary shortcut, the application icon will not be displayed in the

Applications menu.

Applications and Development 249

Applications

The Applications list provides quick access to all the available

applications on the phone.

Calculator

Using this feature allows you to use your device as a calculator. The

calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,

subtraction, multiplication, and division. You can also use this as a

scientific calculator.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Calculator

2. Enter the first number using the numeric keys.

3. Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the

Plus,

Minus, Multiplication,

Division

key.

4. Enter the next number.

5. To view the result, tap the

= (equals)

key.

6. Repeat steps 1 to 4 as many times as required.

Note:

Place the screen in Landscape mode to reveal additional

scientific functions.

250

Calendar

With this feature, you can consult the calendar by day, week, or

month, create events, and set an alarm to act as a reminder. Google

Calendar is built into the phone and synchronizes both new and

existing entries between your phone and your online Google account.

Important!

You should previously add an account (Facebook, Microsoft

Exchange ActiveSync, or Google) prior to using the

Calendar.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Calendar

Tap (

) to display these tabs:

•Year

: displays the Year view.

•Month

: displays the Month view.

•Week

: displays the Week view.

•Day

: displays the Day view.

•List

: displays the events in a List view.

•Task

: allows you to search for tasks.

2. Tap (

Create event

) to create a new Calendar event.

– or –

Tap

Today

to display the current date indicated by a blue box,

then press and select one of the following options:

•Go to

: displays a specific date.

• Delete

: allows you to delete All events, All events before today, or an

individual event.

•Search

: allows you to search within your current events.

Applications and Development 251

•Sync

: synchronizes your current calendar events with your available

accounts (such as Gmail, Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, etc..).

• Settings

: displays a list of configurable settings.

Creating a Calendar Event

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Calendar

2. Tap to access the various calendar tabs.

3. Within the Year, Month, Week, and Day tabs, tap (

Create

event

Calendar Settings

Using the Calendar settings you can select the day with which you

want the calendar to begin. You also select how you want to view the

calendar, by Month, Week, or Day or determine how to manage

events, notifications, sounds, and defaults reminders.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ .

2. Press ➔

Settings

3. Tap

Month view styles

and select a style:

Calendar view + list

Calendar view + pop-up

4. Tap

Week view

and select a type:

Timeline

Analog

5. Tap

First day of week

and select either

Local default, Saturday,

Sunday

Monday

6. Tap

Hide declined events

to activate this option. A check mark

indicates selection.

7. Tap

Lock time zone

(to lock event time based on your current

user-selected time zone). Select a time zone from within the

Select time zone

field.

252

8. Tap

Show week number

to display the week numbers along the

side of the week entries.

9. Tap

Calendars

and select the type of general synchronization

settings you want. A check mark indicates selection.

10. Tap

Set alerts & notifications

to adjust the event notification

method. Choose from:

Alert

Status bar notification

, and

Off

11. Tap

Select ringtone

to assign a ringtone to a calendar event

notification.

12. Tap

Vibration

to assign a vibration notification to this event.

13. Tap

Default reminder time

to assign a default time frame for

event reminders.

14. Tap

Notifications while screen is off

to display notifications on

the full screen while it is turned off.

15. Tap

Quick responses

to edit your default quick responses for

outbound emails. These are default responses similar to those

used by text templates.

16. Tap

Swipe with two fingers

to change the way events are

displayed when swiped.

Applications and Development 253

Camera

Use your 8.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a JPEG

format. The Camcorder shoots High Definition video in an MP4 format.

Note:

A microSD card is no longer necessary before you take pictures

or shoot video.

It is recommended that you confirm your default storage

location for images and videos.



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Camera

Chrome

The Google Chrome app allows you to use the Google Chrome Web

browser on your device.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Chrome

2. Read the Google Chrome Terms of Service and tap

Accept and

Continue

3. If you have an existing Chrome account, tap

to bring

your open tabs, bookmarks, and data from your computer to

your phone, otherwise tap

No thanks

4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google Chrome.

254

Clock

Here you can set an Alarm, configure and view the World clock, use

a Stopwatch, set a Timer, or use a Desk Clock. The applications

display in a tabular format and quickly accessed with the touch of a

finger.



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Clock

Setting an Alarm

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Clock

2. Tap (

Create alarm

3. Use the arrow symbols to enter adjust the hour, and minutes,

then tap

(toggles depending on which was last

selected).

4. Tap the

Alarm repeat

field and touch the number of times you

want this alarm to repeat. Selections are: day blocks or

Repeat

Weekly

. Selected day blocks turn blue when active.

5. Tap the

Alarm type

field and select one of the following:

Melody

Vibration

Vibration and melody

, or

Briefing

6. Tap

to configure additional alarm settings such as

volume slider, Alarm tone, Snooze, Smart alarm, and assign a

Name.

To configure additional alarm settings:

1. Tap

to access additional alarm settings.

2. Slide the slider bar left or right in the

Alarm volume

field to

decrease or increase the alarm volume. A sample of the

volume level plays.

Applications and Development 255

3. Tap the

Alarm tone

field and either select an available tone or

select

Add

to use locate a sound to use as an alarm ringtone.

Tap

to activate the ringtone.

4. Move the

Snooze

slider to the right to activate the feature. Tap

the field to assign a

Interval

time

(3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, or 30 minutes)

and

Repeat

(1 time, 2 times, 3 times, 5 times, and 10 times).

•Interval

indicates the length of time the alarm will remain silent between

alarm notifications (snooze time).

• Repeat

indicates the numbers of snooze sessions that are assigned to

this alarm. How many times will the snooze silence the alarm.

5. Move the

Smart alarm

slider to the right to activate this feature

which slowly increases screen brightness and the volume of

nature tones to simulate dawn breaking.

Tap the field to assign a interval time (3 min, 5 min,

10 min, 15 min, or 30 min) and nature tone (Fairy fountain,

Birdsong by the lake, Sparkling mist, The secret forest,

Serenity, or Gentle spring rain).

•Interval

category describes the length of time the alarm will remain

silent between alarm notifications (snooze time).

•Tone

category provides one of several nature sounds that are used as

the alarm tone.

6. Tap the

Name

field and enter a name for this Alarm.

7. Tap

Save

to store the new alarm event.

256

Turning Off an Alarm



To stop an alarm when it sounds, touch and slide to any

direction.

Setting the Snooze Feature



To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds, touch

and slide to any direction. Snooze must first be set in the

alarm settings.

Deleting an Existing Alarm

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Clock

2. Touch and hold an on-screen alarm event.

3. Tap

Delete

World Clock

This feature allows you to find out what time it is another part of

world.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Clock

2. Tap the

World Clock

tab.

3. Tap

Add city

then scroll and select the desired city, or tap in the

search field to locate a city.

To assign DST settings:

1. Locate a desired city from the World Clock list.

2. Touch and hold a city and select

DST settings

3. Select a DST setting (Automatic, Off, or 1 hour).

If Daylight Savings Time is selected, a sun symbol appears

next to the World Clock city listing.

Applications and Development 257

Stopwatch

This feature allows you to capture elapsed time while letting the

stopwatch keep running.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Clock

) ➔

Stopwatch

tab.

2. Tap

Start

to start the stopwatch counter.

3. Tap

Lap

to begin the lap time counter.

4. Tap

Stop

to stop the counter.

5. Tap

Restart

to restart the lap counter. You can have multiple lap

times.

6. Tap

Reset

to reset the counter.

Setting a Timer

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Clock

) ➔

Timer

tab.

2. Tap the

Hours

Minutes

, or

Seconds

field and use the

on-screen keypad to enter the hour, minute, or seconds. The

timer plays an alarm at the end of the countdown.

3. Tap

Start

to start the timer.

4. Tap

Stop

to stop the timer or

Reset

to reset the timer and start

over.

5. Tap

Restart

to resume the timer counter.

258

Configuring a Desk Clock

This feature lets you activate an on-screen clock that can be viewed

when the device is docked.



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Clock

) ➔

Desk clock

tab.

Contacts

The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your

Contacts List is your phone’s built-in memory.



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Contacts

Downloads

Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current

downloaded files (Internet and Other).

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Downloads

2. Tap an available file category tab (

Internet downloads

Other

downloads

) and select the desired file.

Email enables you to review and create email using most email

services. The device alerts you when you receive an email message.



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Applications and Development 259

Gallery

The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For

photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a slideshow,

set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as a picture

message.



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Gallery

Gmail

Google Mail (Gmail) is a web-based email service. Gmail is

configured when you first set up your phone. Depending on your

synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically synchronize with

your Gmail account on the web.



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Gmail

Google

Use Google Search to search the Web.



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Google

) and

enter the search text.

– or –

Tap on the Google Search bar and say the search

information.

260

Google Settings

As Google has become more intertwined with other applications, this

menu provides a quick and ready access point to configure

preferences for Google+, Maps & Latitude, Location, etc.. You can

also use the Search function to initiate a Google Search from this

menu.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Google Settings

) and select an on-screen option.

2. Tap one of the following options:

Apps with Google+ Sign in

Google+

Play Games

Location

Maps & Latitude

, and

Ads

Follow the on-screen prompts.

Google +

Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot

easier.

1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information, refer to

“Creating a New Google Account” on page 22.

2. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Google+

Applications and Development 261

Group Play

This application lets you share documents, photos or music in

real-time with other connected friends.

Important!

To share a Group Play, all users must be connected to the

same Wi-Fi access point.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Group Play

2. Read the various on-screen information and tap

continue.

3. Follow the on-screen tutorials.

To share a picture with other Group Play users:

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Group Play

2. Tap the available Wi-Fi indicated at the top and verify you are

connected to an active Wi-Fi. This must be the same Wi-Fi

being used by your external recipients.

3. Tap

Share picture

and then select a image by placing a green

checkmark on it and tapping

Done

4. Enter a PIN code and tap

Done

(to secure you session). Pass

this PIN along to all your recipients.

5. Your recipients must then:

•

Launch the Group Play feature on their device.

•

Tap the active Group Play session (shown at the bottom of the

application screen).

•

Your recipients must enter the PIN code you created for the session.

262

You can now interact and draw with the on-screen image, users will

instantaneously see the same gestures and also be able to interact.

Hangouts

Previously known as Google Talk™, is an updated place to hangout,

share photos, and even video calls. This is a free Windows and web-

based application for instant messaging offered by Google.

Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats area in your

Gmail account. This allows you to search a chat log and store them

in your Gmail accounts.



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Hangouts

Help

Provides access to built-in Help information.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Help

2. Select an on-screen topics and follow the built-in navigations.

Internet

Open the browser to start surfing the web. The browser is fully optimized

and comes with advanced functionality to enhance the Internet browsing

feature on your phone.



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Internet

For more information, refer to “Internet” on page 293.

Applications and Development 263

Local

Local (formerly known as Google Places) displays company logos on

a layer of Google Maps. When viewing an area you can quickly locate

a business or person, find out more information about the business,

see coupons, public responses, and more.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Local

2. Tap (

) and then use the

Search Maps

field to

manually enter a desired place or choose from among the

various categories. Matches are filtered by those closest to

your current location.

3. Locate and tap one of the listed options (Restaurants, Cafes,

Bars, Attractions, [user added searches],

RECOMMENDATIONS, or IN THIS AREA a list of places within

this category displays.

4. Tap the Maps icon to launch the related maps feature.

5. Press and then tap

Add a search

. The functions adds

additional search shortcuts to the places screen.

264

Maps

Google Maps allow you to track your current location, view real-time

traffic issues, and view detailed destination directions. There is also

a search tool included to help you locate places of interest or a

specific address. You can view locations on a vector or aerial map, or

you can view locations at the street level.

Important!

Before using Google Maps you must have an active data

(3G/4G) or Wi-Fi connection. The Maps application does

not cover every country or city.



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Maps

Important!

For best results, it is recommended that you enable all of

your location services. For more information, refer to

“Location Services” on page 360.

Enabling a Location source

Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search for

places of interest, you must enable a location source. To enable the

location source you must enable the wireless network, or enable the

GPS satellites.

Important!

The more location determining functions are enabled, the

more accurate the determination will be of your position.

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

➔

Location services

Applications and Development 265

2. Tap

Use wireless networks

allows apps to use data from

sources such as Wi-Fi and mobile networks to provide a better

approximation of your current location.

3. Tap

Use GPS satellites

to enable the GPS satellite.

4. Tap

Location and Google search

to allow Google to use your

location data to improve your search results and other

services.

Tip:

Enabling this feature allows you to locate places of interest at the

street-level. However, this also requires a clear view of the sky

and uses more battery power.

Opening Maps

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Maps

2. Tap the upper-right My location button to find your location on

the map with a blinking blue dot.

3. Locate the bottom row of the buttons to access additional

options:

•Search

: allows you to search for a place of interest.

•Directions

: displays navigation directions to a location from a starting

point.

•Local

: provides access to the places menu where you can quickly locate

a business or person, find out more information about a business, see

coupons, public responses, and more (Local). Locate and tap one of the

listed places (Restaurants, Cafes, Bars, Attractions, or select from

available categories such as Entertainment, ATMs, Gas stations, Hotels,

Post office, or Taxi.)

266

•Layers

: allows you to switch map views:

–

Traffic

: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic conditions are

displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each color represents how fast

the traffic is moving.

–

Satellite

: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth. Satellite

images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the best imagery

available, most of which is approximately one to three years old.

–

Terrain

: combines a topographical view of the area’s terrain with the

current map location.

–

Transit Lines

: displays the overlapping transit lines on your map.

–

Latitude

: allows you to see your friend's locations and share your location

with them.

–

My Maps

: displays a list of your preferred maps.

–

Bicycling

: displays the overlapping cycling trails on your map.

–

Wikipedia

: displays any Wikipedia markers and info on your map.

4. Press and select one of the following options:

•Clear Map

: allows you to remove all markings and layers from the map.

• Make available offline

: allows you to store map-related information

locally on your device and access it even when the device is offline.

• Settings

: allows you to select the following additional options:

–

Display

: allows you to enable/disable the Zoom Buttons, Scale Bar, and

Bubble action.

Applications and Development 267

–

Offline and cache

: allows you to set options to pre-fetch map tiles when

not using Wi-Fi and to clear the cache that holds the map tiles. Choose

from: Automatic caching, Clear all map titles, and Clear My Places cache.

–

Location settings

: lets you access and configure the location settings.

–

: used to log into your existing Google account.

–

Labs

: this is a testing ground for experimental features that aren’t ready

for primetime. They may change, break or disappear at any time. Click on

a Lab to enable or disable it.

–

What’s New

: provides access to the Play Store from where you can

update the application manually.

–

About

: displays general information about Google maps such as Version,

Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received, Free memory, etc.

–

Feedback

: allows you to provide application feedback.

–

Terms, Privacy & Notices

: displays the Terms and Conditions, Privacy

Policy, Legal Notices, or Web History information. Select the desired

information from the pop-up menu.

•Help

: provides help information.

268

Messaging

This application allows you to use the Short Message Service (SMS)

to send and receive short text messages to and from other mobile

phones.

You can also use the Multi Media Service (MMS) to create

multimedia messages to send and receive from other mobile

phones.



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Messaging

Messenger

Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into a

simple group conversation. When you get a new conversation in

Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your phone.

1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information, refer to

“Creating a New Google Account” on page 22.

2. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Messenger

– or –

From the Google+ application, select

Messenger

Music Player

This application allows you to play music files that you have stored

on your microSD card. You can also create playlists.



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Music Player

Applications and Development 269

My Account Downloader

This application provides access to your current account information.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

My Account Downloader

2. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the application.

3. Once installed, open the application and follow the on-screen

instructions.

My Files

This application allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,

bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in one

convenient location. This application allows you to launch a file if the

associated application is already on your phone (ex: MP4).



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

My Files

Note:

Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy structure with

folders, subfolders, etc.

Note:

The application lets you view supported image files and text

files on both your internal storage and microSD card.

270

Opening and Navigating within Files

DCIM is the default location for pictures or video taken by the device.

These files are actually stored in the DCIM folder location.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

My Files

2. Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate your

selected file.

•Home tab

allows you to back up to the root directory.

•Up tab

allows you to back up into a higher directory.

•

Press and then tap

View by

to change the way the files are

displayed on-screen. Choose from:

List

List and details

, or

Thumbnail

•

Press

for these additional options:

Select all

Create folder

View by

Sort by

, and

Settings

•

Place a checkmark alongside a desired folder then select Delete, Share,

or press the upper-right menu button to reveal these additional options:

Move, Copy, Rename, or Details.

3. Once you have located your file, tap the file name to launch the

associated application.

Applications and Development 271

Navigation

Google Maps Navigation (Beta) is an internet-connected turn-by-turn,

GPS navigation system with voice guidance.

Caution!

Traffic data is not real-time and directions may be wrong,

dangerous, prohibited, or involve ferries.

Important!

To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in

the following conditions:

- inside a building or between buildings

- in a tunnel or underground passage

- in poor weather

- around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields

- in a vehicle with tinted windows

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Navigation

2. Read the on-screen disclaimer regarding the current release

status of the Navigation app and tap Accept.

272

Enabling GPS Location

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

➔

Location services

2. Tap

Use wireless networks

allows apps to use data from

sources such as Wi-Fi and mobile networks to provide a better

approximation of your current location.

3. Tap

Use GPS satellites

to enable the GPS satellite.

4. Tap

Location and Google search

to allow Google to use your

location data to improve your search results and other

services.

Navigation options

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Navigation

The navigation application can be configured from the main

screen.

2. If prompted, read the on-screen disclaimer and tap

3. Choose from the following on-screen options:

• Driving/Walking/Bicycling

: tap to configure the method of

travel. Selection of Walking would negate the need to track traffic jams

and obstructions.

• Speak destination

: allows you to use the voice recognition feature to

search for matching locations in your area.

• Type destination

: allows you to manually enter a destination address

(via the on-screen keypad).

•Go home

: allows you to return to a designated “Home” location.

–

When prompted initially to setup a home address, enter the location into

the

Enter an address

field and tap Save.

Applications and Development 273

•Map

: enables the on-screen real-time map functionality.

Navigation Map options

Once on the map screen, you can access the following features:

•

Destination

: returns you to the previous Navigation options screen.

•

Search by voice

: Speak your destination instead of typing.

•

Layers

: allows you to switch map views:

• Traffic view

: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic

conditions are displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each color

represents how fast the traffic is moving.

•Satellite

: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth. Satellite

images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the best imagery

available, most of which is approximately one to three years old.

• Parking

: displays parking information relative to your current location.

• Gas stations

: displays gas station location relative to your current

location.

• ATMs & banks

: displays ATM and Bank locations relative to your current

location.

• Restaurants

: displays restaurant and eatery locations relative to your

current location.

274

While on the map screen, press to access additional options:

•

Set destination

: returns you to the navigation options screen where you

can access a destination by either Speaking, Typing, or selecting from a

Contacts entry or Starred Place.

•

: manually search for a destination address, place, name of

business, or even a type of business.

•

Layers

: allows you to switch map views. See previous description.

•

Settings

: provides access to both Power settings (Screen dimming) and

Information (Terms, privacy & notices).

•

Exit navigation

: terminates the application.

•

Help

: provides on-screen help.

Phone

This application provides the ability to make or answering calls,

access the Contacts list, which is used to store contact information.



From the Home screen, tap (

Phone

For more information, refer to “Call Functions and Contacts List” on

page 79.

Applications and Development 275

Play Books

Formerly known as Google Books, this application allows you to read

over 3 million ebooks on the go.

Build your ebooks library in the cloud with Play Books: jump right

into a bestseller or select from nearly 3 million free ebooks.

Personalize the reader to your liking, pick up reading where you left

off on your phone or computer, and settle down with a great book on

your Android phone!

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Play Books

2. If prompted, tap

Turn sync on

. This synchronizes your books

you have previously selected between your Books account and

your device.

3. Tap to begin searching for both free and paid ebooks.

4. Follow the on-screen prompts to download the ebook to your

device.

276

Play Magazines

With Google Play Magazines, you can subscribe to your favorite

magazines and have them available to read on your device at any

time or any place.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Play

Magazines

2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already done so.

For more information, refer to “Signing into Your Google

Account” on page 23.

3. At the main screen, tap the upper-left

Read Now

link and then

select

Shop

to browse the full catalog.

4. Sweep the screen to the left or right to view Categories,

Featured, Top Selling, and New Arrivals.

5. Tap a magazine to see more information and subscribe.

6. Follow the on-screen instructions to subscribe or purchase a

magazine.

Applications and Development 277

Play Movies & TV

This application allows you to connect to the Play Store, download a

movie and then watch it instantly.

Learn more about Google Play Movies at:

http://play.google.com/about/movies



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Play Movies & TV

). A list of videos sorted on the SD card

displays in the Video list.

Play Music

Also known as Google Music, allows you to browse, shop, and

playback songs purchased from the Play Store. The music you

choose is automatically stored in your Google Music library and

instantly ready to play or download.



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Play Music

278

Play Store

Formerly known as the “Android Market”, this application provides

access to downloadable applications and games to install on your

phone. The Play Store also allows you to provide feedback and

comments about an application, or flag an application that might be

incompatible with your phone.

Before using the Play Store, you must have a Google Account.

Accessing the Play Store

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Play Store

2. If not already logged in with your Google account, tap

3. Tap

Existing

, enter your Google account information and tap

(

4. Tap

to agree to the Play Store terms of service.

Downloading a New Google Application

To download a new application, you will need to use your Google

account to sign in to the Play Store. The home page provides several

ways to find applications. The home page features applications and

includes a list of item applications by category, a list of games, a link

to search, and a link to My apps.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Play Store

2. Browse through the categories, find an application you're

interested in, and tap the name.

3. Read the application descriptions.

Applications and Development 279

Important!

If the selected application requires access to data or

control of a function on your device, the Play Store displays

the information the application will access.

Tap

if you agree to the conditions of the application.

Once you tap

on this screen you are responsible for

using this application on the device and the amount of data

it uses. Use this feature with caution.

4. Tap

Install

➔

Note:

Use caution with applications which request access to any

personal data, functions, or significant amounts of data usage

times.

5. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to pay for the

application.

6. Check the progress of the current download by opening the

Notifications panel. The content download icon appears

in the notification area of the status bar.

7. On the main Play Store screen, press and then tap

My apps

, tap an installed application in the list, and then tap

Open

Tip:

The newly downloaded applications display in the applications list

and are shown in alphabetical order if the View Type is set to

Alphabetical grid or Alphabetical list, or at the end of the list if

View type is set to Customizable grid.

280

Note:

A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply.

Please contact your service provider for further details.

Launching an Installed Google Application

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

2. Tap the newly installed application. This application is typically

located on the last Applications page.

Unknown sources

This feature can be used for Android application development. The

feature allows developers to install non-Play Store applications.



From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

➔

Security

➔

Unknown sources

Unknown sources displays a check mark to indicate it is

active.

Note:

If Unknown sources is disabled, those applications without a

certificate will not be allowed to download to your device.

Manage applications

This feature allows you to manage and remove installed

applications. You can also view the amount of memory or resources

used as well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the

applications on your device and clear the data, cache, or defaults.



From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

➔

Application manager

Applications and Development 281

Clearing application cache and data

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

➔

Application manager

2. Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data.

3. Tap

Force stop

Uninstall, Clear data

Clear cache

, or

Clear

defaults

Uninstalling third-party applications

You can uninstall any application you downloaded and installed from

the Play Store.

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

➔

Application manager

➔

ALL

2. Tap the third-party application, and from the

App info

screen,

tap

Uninstall

282

S Memo

The S Memo application allows you to create memos using the

keypad, your finger, or both. You can add images, voice recordings,

and text all in one place.

Creating a New Memo

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

S Memo

The S Memo screen is displayed.

2. Tap an existing Memo to open it then tap the screen to enter

edit mode.

– or –

Tap to start a new memo in text mode with the keypad

displayed or tap to start a new memo in drawing mode

using your finger or a compatible

on-screen writing tool. You can change back and forth in a

memo to add text with the keypad and the pen.

The icons that you see displayed on the screen are described in the

following table:

Saves the current memo and creates a new one.

Changes the view mode.

Allows you to add free-format drawing.

Displays the keypad to you can add text.

Eraser tool allows you to erase marks and drawings.

Applications and Development 283

3. Press to access the following options:

Note:

Depending on whether you have saved the memo, are in keypad

mode, or in handwriting mode, the options will appear

differently. The following is a list of the options you may see.

•Rename

: allows you to change the current memo title.

•Share via

: allows you to share your memo using Group Play, Hangouts,

Picasa, Google+, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct, Messaging, Gmail, or Email.

• Handwriting-to-text

: allows you to transcribe handwriting into text.

•Export

: allows you to save the memo to your Gallery as either a JPG or

as a PDF.

•Save as

: allows you to save the memo with a different name.

• Add picture

: allows you to add an image to the current memo. Choose

from: Picture, Take picture, Clip Art, Clipboard, or Map.

•Add tag

: allows you to set tags to add in searches.

Undo the last action.

Redo the last action that was undone.

Make a voice recording to add to the memo.

Hide the secondary toolbar.

Show the secondary toolbar.

Add an additional page to the memo.

284

•Add as favorite

: allows you to tag the current memo as a favorite.

• Change background

: allows you to set the background for your memo.

Swipe the screen to the left or right to select a background and then tap

Done

• Link to Calendar

: allows you to link the memo to your Calendar.

•Lock

: allows you to lock an email by using a PIN number.

•Set as

: allows you to set a memo as a contact icon, Home screen

wallpaper, or Lock screen wallpaper.

•Print

: allows you to print the screen or web page on a Samsung printer

using Wi-Fi.

When you are finished creating your memo, tap

Save

on the top

menu bar.

S Voice

Launches your phone’s built-in voice recognition system that allows

you to initiate several common tasks without having to touch the

phone. Features include: Call, Text, Navigate, Play music, Memo, and

Driving mode.



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

) ➔ (

S Voice

For more information, refer to “Using S Voice” on page 91.

Applications and Development 285

Samsung Link

This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung mobile

phone with your TV, streams content and even keeps tabs on who

calls or sends text messages with real-time, on-screen monitoring.

Samsung’s Samsung Link makes staying connected easy.

Allows users to share their in-device media content with other

external devices using DLNA certified™ (Digital Living Network

Alliance) Devices. These external devices must also be DLNA-

compliant. Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a digital

multimedia streamer.

AllShare/Samsung Link Definitions:

Samsung Link/

AllShare Play

This new feature builds on the

previous AllShare Play functionality. It

includes features such as Web storage

integration and social networking

integration. This is a Web service

that requires using a Samsung account.

Group Play

A subset feature of Samsung Link, this

allows you to mirror photos and

multimedia presentations with other

members of your current Wi-Fi

group. Users must be on the same

Wi-Fi and provide an access code to

join the group.

286

Important!

You must first connect both of your communicating

devices to the same Wi-Fi and be using an

active/registered Samsung account prior to using this

application.

For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi settings” on

page 321.

For more information, refer to “Creating a Samsung

Account” on page 25.

Important!

The Samsung account manages the access information

(username/password) to several applications, such as

Samsung Link.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Samsung Link

2. If prompted, read the on-screen message about network

charges and tap

to continue and return to the main screen.

3. If prompted, tap

to log into your Samsung account.

Note:

If the main screen still shows a Sign in box, close the application

and restart it.

AllShare Cast

(with Hub

accessory)

This feature functions with an

external AllShareCast Hub to fully

mirror what is currently displayed on

your device to the external TV.

Applications and Development 287

4. Tap

Start

and follow the on-screen prompts.

Settings

This icon navigates to the sound and phone settings for your phone.

It includes such settings as: display, security, memory, and any extra

settings associated with your phone.



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Settings

– or –

Press ➔ and then tap

Settings

For more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on

page 321.

Video Player

The Video player application plays video files stored on your microSD

card.



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Video Player

288

Voice Recorder

The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to one

minute long and then immediately send it as a message.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Voice Recorder

2. Tap (

Record

) to record an audio file.

3. Tap (

Stop

) to stop recording. The file automatically saves

to the Voice list.

4. Tap (

Pause

) to pause the recording of an audio file.

5. Tap (

Cancel

) to cancel the recording of an audio file.

6. Tap (

List

) to display a list of current receordings.

7. From the Recorded files page, press and then select one

of the following:

•Share via

and select a method in which to share this audio file.

Selections are: Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Group Play, Messaging, or

Wi-Fi Direct. Refer to each specific section, depending on the method

you selected to send this voice recording.

• Delete

: allows you to delete 1 or more voice recordings. Tap the

recordings to delete and tap

Delete

• Settings

: the following settings are available:

–

Storage

: allows you to choose where your recordings will be saved.

Select between Phone or memory card.

–

Recording quality

: allows you to set the recording quality to High or

Normal.

Applications and Development 289

–

Limit for MMS

: allows you to select On or Off. If you Limit for MMS by

selecting On, you will be assured that the recording can be sent in a

message.

–

Contextual filename

: allows you to assign a filename based on GPS tag

information.

–

Default name

: allows you to choose the name prefix for your recordings.

For example, if your Default name is Voice, your recordings would be

named Voice 001, Voice 002, Voice 003, etc.

•End

: allows you to exit the application.

Voice Search

Launches the Google Now application that is used for voice to text

Internet searching.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔

(

Voice Search

2. When prompted, speak into the built-in microphone.

3. Use the on-screen options to find a matching search term.

290

VPN Client

This is a full-featured VPN Client that provides support for the latest

IPSec VPN standards and provides interoperability with support for

all major VPN Gateways.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

VPN Client

2. Follow the on-screen instructions to configure the VPN Client.

•

Options include: Add VPN Connection or My VPN Connections.

YouTube

YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload and

share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

YouTube

2. When the screen loads you can begin searching and viewing

posted videos.

To configure YouTube Settings:



Press and then tap

Settings

and configure the following

parameters:

• General

–

High quality on mobile

, when enabled, allows you to start all videos in

high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile network.

–

Caption font size

allows you to set the font size used by on-screen

captions. Choose from: Small, Medium, Large, or Huge.

–

Uploads

specifies network preferences for uploads.

–

Content localization

allows you to prioritize channels and videos from

a specific country or region.

Applications and Development 291

–

Improve YouTube

allows you to anonymously send YouTube

information to help improve the application.

• Connected TVs

–

Allows you to piar your device to a wireless TV running a YouTube

application. Options include Add a TV and Edit TVs.

•Search

–

Clear search history

allows you to clear previous YouTube searches

from showing up in the YouTube search box.

–

Never remember history

allows you to force YouTube to never store

search history information.

–

SafeSearch filtering

allows you to configure block settings for videos

containing restricted content. This option blocks these videos from

appearing within your search results. Choose from: Don’t filter, Moderate,

or Strict blocking.

• Preloading

–

Preload subscriptions

allows you to preload (or go get videos while on

Wi-Fi and charging) your subscription videos.

–

Preload watch later

allows you to enable the preload function on

selected videos so you can watch them later. Read the data usage

information and tap

to accept the terms.

Note:

Preloading YouTube videos will use some of your device’s

storage space and may result in additional charges if your Wi-Fi

plan is not unlimited.

292

•About

–

Help

provides answers to most YouTube questions.

–

Feedback

allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube.

–

Google Mobile Terms of Service

–

YouTube Terms of Service

–

Google Mobile Privacy Policy

–

YouTube Privacy Policy

–

Open source licenses

–

App version

displays the software version for the current YouTube

application.

To watch a high quality video:



Press and then tap

Settings

➔

General

➔

High quality on

mobile

Connections 293

Section 9: Connections

Your phone is equipped with features that allow you to quickly

connect to the web.

Internet

Your device is equipped with a Google browser to navigate the

mobile web. This section explains how to navigate the browser and

use the basic features.

Accessing the Internet

To access the Browser:



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Internet

Note:

You must disable your Wi-Fi connection if you wish

to view the home page.

Navigating with the Browser

1. Tap an entry to select an item.

2. Sweep the screen with your finger in an up or down motion to

scroll through a website.

3. To return to a previous page, tap .

4. To move forward to a web page, tap .

294

Browser Options

1. From the top of the browser screen, select one of the available

options:

• Navigation

: use the forward and back buttons to navigate through your

browsing activity.

•Refresh

: reloads the current page.

• Bookmarks

: provides access to the Bookmarks screen.

•Windows

: displays a list of the windows you have open.

– or –

From the home page, press to access the following

options:

•New window

: launches a new browser window.

•Add bookmark

: allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list.

• Add shortcut to home screen

: creates a shortcut to the web2go Home

page and then places it on an open area on an available extended

screen.

• Share page

: allows you to share the page using Gmail or as a message.

• Find on page

: allows you to search in the current page.

•Desktop view

: allows you to assign the browser to display the current

page in the desktop view (to closely mimic the display as it would appear

on a Desktop computer).

• Save for offline reading

: allows you to store the current page in

memory so that it can be read later even if you loose your Internet

connection.

Connections 295

•Brightness

: allows you to assign a brightness level specifically for the

browser window. This is independent of the brightness assigned within

the device’s Settings menu.

•Downloads

: displays the download history.

•Print

: provides print access on compatible Samsung printers.

• Settings

: allows you to change the way you view your web pages by

changing these options. For more information, refer to

“Browser

Settings”

on page 303.

Entering a URL

You can access a website quickly by entering the URL. Websites are

optimized for viewing on your phone.

To enter a URL and go to a particular website:



From the homepage tap the URL field at the top of the screen,

enter the URL and tap .

Note:

This is not the same application as the Google Search Widget.

296

Using Reader Mode

When activated, this feature restructures the current Web page to

provide a more reader-friendly experience. The text size can be

adjusted for easier reading.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Internet

2. Navigate to a graphic heavy or content rich Web page.

3. If (

Reader Mode

) appears in the Address bar, tap it to

activate the feature.

4. Adjust the Font size or tap (

Share via

•Share via

: allows you to share the website via Bluetooth, Email, Gmail,

Google, Google+, Hangouts, Messaging, S Memo, or Wi-Fi Direct.

Search the Internet

To perform an Internet search using keywords:

1. From within the Google search application, tap the Google

search field, enter the keyword(s) to search using the

on-screen keypad.

2. Tap from the list of search results that are displayed.

3. Tap a link to view the website.

Connections 297

Adding and Deleting Windows

You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time.

To add a new window:

1. From your browser window, tap (

Window

) ➔

(

New window

2. A new browser window displays.

Note:

The number of currently open windows is displayed at the

bottom of the WIndows screen.

3. Scroll across the screen to view the currently active windows

and tap an entry to launch the selected Internet window.

To delete an existing window:

1. From your browser window, tap (

Windows

2. Scroll across the available windows and locate your target

window.

3. Tap next to the listing to delete the window.

Going Incognito

The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites outside of the

normal browsing. Pages viewed in this incognito window won’t

appear within your browser history or search history, and no traces

(such as cookies) are left on your device.

Note:

Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on your

device after you exit the incognito mode.

298

To add a new incognito window:

1. From your browser window, tap (

Windows

) ➔

(

Incognito

2. A new browser window displays.

Note:

The incognito icon appears in the upper-left of the new browser

window while you are in this mode.

To exit from the incognito window:

1. From your browser window, tap (

Windows

2. Scroll across the available windows and locate the incognito

window.

3. Tap next to the incognito listing to delete this window.

Using Bookmarks

While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to quickly and

easily access it at a future time. The URLs (website addresses) of the

bookmarked sites display in the Bookmarks page. From the

Bookmarks page you can also view your Most visited websites and

view your History.

1. From the webpage, tap (

Bookmarks

The

Bookmarks

page displays. Additional pages include

History

and

Saved pages

2. Press to display the following options:

• List/Thumbnail view

: Select

Thumbnail view

(default) to view a

thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed, or select

List view

view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed.

• Create folder

: Creates a new folder in which to store new bookmarks.

Connections 299

• Change order

: Rearranges the current bookmarks.

• Move to folder

: Selected bookmarks are moved to a selected folder.

•Delete

: Erases selected bookmarks.

3. Tap a bookmark to view the webpage, or touch and hold a

bookmark for the following options:

•Open

: Opens the webpage of the selected bookmark.

• Open in new window

: Opens the webpage in a new window.

•Edit bookmark

: Allows you to edit the name or URL of the bookmark.

For more information, refer to

“Editing Bookmarks”

on page 300.

• Add shortcut to home screen

: Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked

webpage to your phone’s Home screen.

• Share link

: Allows you to share a URL address via Bluetooth, Email,

Gmail, Google+, Hangouts, Messaging, S Memo, or Wi-Fi Direct.

• Copy link URL

: Allows you to copy the URL address to use in a

message.

• Delete bookmark

: Allows you to delete a bookmark. For more

information, refer to

“Deleting Bookmarks”

on page 301.

• Set as homepage

: Sets the bookmark to your new homepage.

300

Adding Bookmarks

1. From the webpage, tap ➔

Add bookmark

2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the name of the bookmark

and the URL.

3. Tap the

Location

field to assign a folder location.

Home

is the default.

4. Select a storage location for your new bookmark.

5. Tap

Save

. The new save page now appears on the Bookmarks

page.

Editing Bookmarks

1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark you

want to edit.

2. Tap

Edit bookmark

3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the name of the bookmark or

the URL.

4. Tap the

Location

field to assign a new folder location.

Home

is the default.

5. Tap

Save

Cancel

to exit the operation.

Connections 301

Deleting Bookmarks

1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark you

want to delete.

2. Tap

Delete bookmark

3. At the confirmation window, tap

Emptying the Cookies

A cookie is a small file placed on your phone by a website during

navigation. In addition to containing some site-specific information, a

cookie can also contain some personal information (such as a

username and password) which might pose a security risk if not

properly managed. You can clear these cookies from your device at

any time.

1. From an active Web page, press and then tap

Settings

➔

Privacy and security

➔

Clear all cookie data

2. Tap

to delete the cookies or tap

Cancel

to exit.

302

Using Web History

The History list displays a list of the most recently viewed websites.

These entries can be used to return to previously unmarked web

pages.

1. From the webpage, tap ➔

History

tab.

2. Select a visited range category. Choose from: Today, Yesterday,

or Most visited.

3. Tap an entry to display the webpage.

– or –

Press and then tap

Clear history

to delete the current

History list.

Using Most Visited

The Most visited list provides you with a list of the most visited and

bookmarked websites. These entries are used to return to previously

unmarked web pages.

1. From the webpage, tap ➔

History

➔

Most visited

tab.

A list of your most frequently visited webpages displays. The

most frequently visited web pages display at the top of the list.

2. Tap any entry to display the selected webpage.

Connections 303

Browser Settings

To configure browser settings:

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Internet

2. Press and then tap

Settings

3. Choose an option from the following categories:

General:

• Set home page

: Sets the current home page for the Web browser.

•Form auto-fill

: Allows you to fill in Web forms with a single tap.

• Auto-fill text

: Allows you to set the text used for the Web form auto-fill

feature.

Privacy and security:

• Clear cache

: Deletes all currently cached data. Tap

to complete the

process.

•Clear history

: Clears the browser navigation history. Tap

to complete

the process.

• Show security warnings

: Notifies you if there is a security issue with

the current website. Remove the check mark to disable this function.

• Accept cookies

: Allows sites, that require cookies, to save and read

cookies from your device.

• Clear all cookie data

: Deletes all current browser cookie files.

• Remember form data

: Allows the device to store data from any

previously filled out forms. Remove the check mark to disable this

function.

• Clear form data

: Deletes any stored data from previously filled out

forms. Tap

to complete the process.

304

• Enable location

: Allows websites to request access to your location.

• Clear location access

: Clears location access for all websites. Tap

to complete the process.

• Remember passwords

: Stores usernames and passwords for visited

sites. Remove the check mark to disable this function.

•Clear passwords

: Deletes any previously stored usernames or

passwords. Tap

to complete the process.

• Enable notifications

: Enables notifications for all websites. Select

either: Always on, On demand (user driven), or Off.

• Clear notifications

: Clears Web notification access for all websites.

Tap

to complete the process.

Accessibility:

• Force zoom

: Allows you to override a website’s zoom setting and forces

a zoom view.

•Text size

: Allows you to manually adjust the size of the on-screen text

size (Scale text up and down), Zoom amount on double tap, and

minimum font size via the use of an on-screen slider.

• Inverted rendering

: Allows you to adjust the way a Web page is

displayed to make it easier to view or read. Enabling this feature causes

a page to rendered in reverse - Black becomes white and vice versa.

On-screen white text is displayed as white text on a black background.

•Contrast

: Allows you to adjust the on-screen contrast.

Note:

The Contrast feature is disabled until the Inverted rendering

function is active.

Connections 305

Advanced:

• Select search engine

: Allows you to choose a default search engine for

your phone. Choose from:

Google Search

Yahoo!

, or

Bing

• Open in background

: New pages are launched in a separate page and

displayed behind the current one. Remove the check mark to disable

this function.

• Enable JavaScript

: Enables javascript for the current Web page.

Without this feature, some pages may not display properly. Remove the

check mark to disable this function.

• Allow multiple tabs per app

: Provides the ability for different

applications to launch separate tabs.

• Enable plug-ins

: Allows the download of plug-ins such as Adobe Flash.

•Default storage

: Sets the default storage to Memory card.

• Website settings

: View advanced settings for individual websites.

• Default zoom

: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium, or Close.

• Open pages in overview

: Displays an overview of recently viewed web

pages.

• Auto-fit pages

: Allows web pages to be resized to fit as much of the

screen as possible.

• Block pop-ups

: Prevents popup advertisement or windows from

appearing on-screen. Remove the check mark to disable this function.

• Text encoding

: Adjusts the current text encoding.

• Reset to default

: Clears all browser data and resets all settings to

default.

306

Bandwidth Management:

• Preload search results

: Allows the browser to preload high confidence

search results in the background. If the device can accurately guess

your in progress search, it will preempt you by beginning to load the

matching Web page before you complete the search request.

• Page preloading

: Allows the browser to preload pages in the

background.

•Load images

: Allows web page images to load along with the other text

components of a loaded website.

Labs:

• Quick controls

: allows you to enable on-screen quick controls via the

use of Swype thumb actions.

• Full screen

: Allows Web pages to be resized to fit as much of the screen

as possible.

Connections 307

Bluetooth

About Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that allows

you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth devices, such as

headsets and hands-free car kits, and Bluetooth-enabled handhelds,

computers, printers, and wireless devices. The Bluetooth

communication range is usually up to approximately 30 feet.

Turning Bluetooth On and Off

To turn Bluetooth on:

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

2. In a single motion touch and slide the

Bluetooth

slider to the

right to turn it on.

The slider color indicates the activation status. When active,

displays in the Status area.

To turn Bluetooth off:

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

2. In a single motion touch and slide the

Bluetooth

slider to the

left to turn it off .

Bluetooth Status Indicators

The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status

at a glance:

Displays when Bluetooth is active.

Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and

communicating.

OFF

308

Bluetooth Settings

The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of the

characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service, including:

•

Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth

communication and description

•

Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other Bluetooth

devices

•

Displaying your device’s Bluetooth address

To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Bluetooth

2. Verify Bluetooth is active (indicated by ).

3. Press and tap the

Rename device

Visible time-out

, and

Received files

fields to set the options.

To change your Bluetooth name:

1. Verify Bluetooth is active.

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap

Rename device

3. Enter a new name.

4. Tap

to complete the rename process.

To set visibility:

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.

2. From the top of the Bluetooth settings page, toggle the state of

the visibility check mark. Activating this feature enabled your

device visible allows other devices to pair and communicate.

Connections 309

Note:

Your device visibility is based on the time set within the Visible

time-out field (2 Minutes, 5 Minutes, 1 Hour, or Never timeout).

Press (

) ➔

Visible time-out

This value appears as a countdown within this

Visible

time-out

field.

To scan for Bluetooth devices:

1. Verify Bluetooth is active.

2. From the bottom of the Bluetooth settings page, tap

Scan

search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices such

as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.

To review your Bluetooth received files:

1. Verify Bluetooth is active.

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, press and then tap

Received files

310

Pairing Bluetooth Devices

The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted

connections between your device and another Bluetooth device.

When you pair devices, they share a passkey, allowing for fast,

secure connections while bypassing the discovery and

authentication process.

Note:

Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time process.

Once pairing is established the devices continue to recognize

their partnership and exchange information without entering a

passcode.

To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:

1. Verify Bluetooth is active.

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the

Visibility

checkbox

(shown by the device name).

Your device must be visible to successfully pair with an

external device. This is shown by a green check mark.

3. Tap

Scan

. Your device displays a list of discovered in-range

Bluetooth devices.

4. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.

5. If prompted, enter a passkey or PIN code, and tap

6. The external device must accept the connection and enter your

device’s PIN code.

Once successfully paired to an external device, displays

in the Status area.

Connections 311

Note:

Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetooth-

compatible devices, display and operations may be different,

and functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible

with all Bluetooth-compatible devices.

Important!

If callers can not hear you during a call while using a

paired Bluetooth headset (with built-in microphone), verify

the

Call audio

option is enabled within the entry’s Bluetooth

Settings page.

Configuring Bluetooth Device Settings

Some connected Bluetooth devices are capable of more than just

functioning as a headphone, but also have built in microphones for

picking up voice. Although both functions are detected by the device

and activated, there might be times when you need to change or

update these settings for Phone and Media Audio:

•

I can hear the other person but they can’t hear me...

•

I want to use my Bluetooth device only as a headphone

1. Verify Bluetooth is active.

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap (

Settings

3. Toggle the

Call audio

field to activate/de-activate the Bluetooth

device’s on-board microphone.

4. Toggle the

Media audio

field to activate/de-activate the

Bluetooth device’s headset functions.

312

Note:

If callers can not hear you during a call while using a paired

Bluetooth headset (with built-in microphone), verify the

Call

audio

option is enabled within the entry’s Bluetooth Settings

page.

Disconnecting a Paired Bluetooth Device

Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection between the

device and your phone, but retains the knowledge of the pairing. At a

later point when you wish to reconnect the device, there is no need

to setup the connection information again.

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously paired

device (from the bottom of the page).

3. Tap

to confirm disconnection.

Note:

Disconnections are manually done but often occur automatically

if the paired device goes out of range of your phone or it is

powered off.

Deleting a Paired Bluetooth Device

Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection record” and

upon reconnection would require that you re-enter all the previous

pairing information.

1. Verify Bluetooth is active.

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap (

Settings

)

➔

Unpair

to delete the paired device.

Connections 313

Sending Contacts via Bluetooth

Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities, you

may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or other items

using a Bluetooth connection.

Note:

Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be enabled on

both your phone and the external device, and the recipient’s

device must be visible.

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active and your phone is visible.

2. From the Home screen, tap (

Contacts

3. Touch and hold the entry from the list to display the

on-screen context menu.

4. Tap

Share namecard via

➔

Bluetooth

and select a paired

external Bluetooth device.

Note:

The external Bluetooth device must be visible and

communicating for the pairing to be successful.

5. A Bluetooth share notification displays in your notifications list.

314

Enable Downloading for Web Applications

Important!

Before you can download a web application you must

insert an SD into the phone and enable the

Unknown

sources

feature (enables downloading). For more

information, refer to “Installing the microSD Memory Card”

on page 12.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Security

➔

Unknown sources

check box.

2. Tap

to allow install of non-Play Store applications.

Tap again to remove the check mark and disable the

installation of non-Play Store applications.

Warning!

Not all web applications are safe to download. In order to

protect your phone and data, use the Play Store to install

web applications. For more information, refer to

“Downloading a New Google Application” on page 278.

Connections 315

PC Connections

You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC data cable

using various USB connection modes.

Media storage

: allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of both

the device and optional microSD to store and upload files. This

feature allows your computer to detect the device as a removable

storage drive.

Kies air

: allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your

phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi network.

Kies

: allows you to manage music, movies and photos. You can also

backup precious contacts and calendars, download apps and

podcasts and automatically upgrade device firmware. Kies

conveniently syncs your life across all your devices.

Note:

To sync your device to your computer it is highly recommended

that you install Samsung Kies which is available at

http://www.samsung.com/kies

(for Windows/Mac).

Note:

If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have Windows XP

Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your computer. Also,

ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0 or Windows Media

Player 10 or higher installed on your computer.

316

Connecting as a Storage Device

You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and access

the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the device, you can

also access the files directory from the memory card by using the

device as a memory card reader.

Note:

The file directory of the memory card displays as a removable

disk, separate from the internal memory.

1. Connect the USB cable to the device and connect the cable to

the computer. After a few seconds, a pop-up window displays

on the PC when connected.

2. Open the folder to view files.

3. Copy files from the PC to the memory card.

Prior to using Kies air for Phone Update

Before using Kies air to upgrade your device, it is recommended that

you backup your personal data prior to use.

To export a Contact list to your microSD card:

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Contacts

2. Press and then tap

Import/Export

3. Tap

Export to SD card

➔

Connections 317

Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card:

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Gallery

2. Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos.

3. Remove the back cover and remove the internal microSD card

prior to initiating a Kies air update.

Enabling USB Debugging

USB debugging must be enabled before being able to use the

Development feature.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Developer options.

2. Tap the

USB debugging

field to verify the feature is active

before connecting your USB cable.

3. Using an optional PC data cable, connect the multifunction jack

on your device to a PC.

Wi-Fi

About Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity") is a term used for certain types of

Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN). Wi-Fi communication requires

access to an existing and accessible Wireless Access Point (WAP).

These WAPs can either be Open (unsecured) as within most Hot

Spots, or Secured (requiring knowledge of the Router name and

password).

Note:

After you complete a connection to an active Wi-Fi network, the

Wi-Fi Calling feature will automatically be enabled.

318

Note:

For additional information on WPS Connections, refer to "WPS

Push Button" on page 324 and "WPS PIN Entry" on page 325.

Activating Wi-Fi

By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off (deactivated).

Activating Wi-Fi allows your device to discover and connect to

compatible in-range WAPs (Wireless Access Points).

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

2. In a single motion touch and slide the

Wi-Fi

slider to the right to

turn it on. The slider color indicates the activation status. The

device scans for available in-range wireless networks and

displays them under Wi-Fi networks on the same screen.

Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

➔

Wi-Fi

The network names and security settings (Open network or

Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi networks display in the

Wi-Fi networks section.

2. Tap the network you wish to connect to.

Note:

When you select an open network you are automatically

connected.

3. Enter a wireless password (if necessary).

4. Tap

Connect

Connections 319

Wi-Fi Status Indicators

The following icons indicate the Wi-Fi connection status:

Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and

communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).

Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an available

open wireless network.

Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and configured for a

direct connection to another compatible device in the

same direct communication mode.

Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and

communicating.

Manually Add a New Network Connection

1. From the Wi-Fi network screen, tap

Add Wi-Fi network

2. Enter the Network SSID (the name of your Wireless Access

Point).

3. Tap the

Security

field and select a security option. This must

match the current security setting on your target WAP.

4. Enter your WAP’s password if the WAP is secure.

5. Tap

Save

to store the new information and connect to the target

WAP.

Note:

No prompt to enter the WAP key displays if this is the second

time to connect to a previously accessed or secured wireless

network. The WAP key is required when the device is reset

using factory default settings.

320

Deactivating Wi-Fi

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

2. In a single motion touch and slide the

Wi-Fi

slider to the left to

turn it off.

– or –

Activate and Deactivate Wi-Fi from the Notification bar.

Note:

Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth

can reduce battery life and use times.

Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Wi-Fi.

2. In a single motion touch and slide the

Wi-Fi

slider to the right to

turn it on.

3. Tap

Scan

Wi-Fi Advanced Settings

The Wi-Fi settings - Advanced menu allows you to set up many of

the device’s Wi-Fi services, including:

•

Setting the Wi-Fi sleep policy

•

Check for Internet service

•

Viewing the device’s MAC Address

•

Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP

To access the Wi-Fi Advanced Settings menu:

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Wi-Fi

2. Press and then tap➔

Advanced

Changing Your Settings 321

Section 10: Changing Your Settings

This section explains the sound and phone settings for your device. It

includes such settings as: display, security, memory, and any extra

settings associated with your device.

Accessing Settings



From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Settings

– or –

Press ➔ and then tap

Settings

. The Settings

screen displays.

Wi-Fi Settings

This section describes the Wi-Fi settings. For more information, refer

to “Wi-Fi” on page 317.

Activating Wi-Fi

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

2. In a single motion touch and slide the

Wi-Fi

slider to the right to

turn it on . The device scans for available in-range

wireless networks and displays them under Wi-Fi networks on

the same screen.

Wi-Fi settings

Once set up for Wi-Fi connectivity, your device automatically uses

Wi-Fi, when available, for all your mobile services.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Wi-Fi.

2. Press and then tap

Advanced

. Configure the settings as

desired.

322

The available Wi-Fi connection are displayed with a security type

displayed next to them.

Network Notification

By default, when Wi-Fi is on, you receive notifications in the Status

bar anytime your phone detects an available Wi-Fi network. You can

deactivate this feature if you do not want to receive notifications.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Wi-Fi

2. Press and then tap

Advanced.

3. Tap

Network notification

. A check mark displayed next to the

feature indicates Network notification is active.

4. Tap

Network notification

again to remove the check mark and

deactivate this feature.

Wi-Fi During Sleep

By default, when your device enter a sleep mode, your Wi-Fi

connection stays on all the time. If the feature is Never enabled

during sleep that current data usage is taken over by your SIM and

its network connection.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Wi-Fi

2. Press and then tap

Advanced

➔

Keep Wi-Fi on during

sleep

3. Select an available option:

•Always

: maintains your current active Wi-Fi connection even during

sleep.

• Only when plugged in

: maintains the active Wi-Fi connection only

when the device detects it is connected to a power supply. This reduced

the drain on your device’s battery.

Changing Your Settings 323

• Never (increases data usage)

: shuts off the current Wi-Fi connection

during sleep and diverts any current data usage to the cellular network

connection.

Check for Internet Service

Allows you to check for Wi-Fi Internet access once connected to a

WAP (Wireless Access Point).

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Wi-Fi.

2. Press and then tap

Advanced

3. Tap the

Check for Internet service

field to activate the feature. A

green checkmark indicates the feature is active.

Finding your WI-Fi Address Information

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Wi-Fi.

2. Press and then tap

Advanced

3. Locate the MAC Address and IP Address information at the

bottom of the screen.

•MAC address

: view your device’s MAC address, required when

connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).

•IP address

: view your device’s IP address.

324

Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Wi-Fi

➔

Add Wi-Fi network

2. Enter the Network SSID (the name of your Wireless Access

Point).

3. Tap the

Security

field and select a security option. This must

match the current security setting on your target WAP

(Wireless Access Point).

4. Enter your WAP’s password if the WAP is secure.

5. Tap

Save

to store the new information and connect to the target

WAP.

Note:

An SSID is a unique key which identifies a wireless LAN. Its

purpose is to stop other wireless equipment from accessing

your LAN — whether accidentally or intentionally. To

communicate, wireless devices must be configured with the

same SSID.

WPS Push Button

The WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) feature (sometimes associated with

a physical or on-screen button on most WAPs) allows you to pair

your device and WAP without the need for entering a passcode. This

process is similar to Wi-Fi Direct pairing.

In this case, once the WPS feature is active on your WAP, your device

can then detect it and then immediately pair to it.

Note:

WPS-capable routers appear in the Wi-Fi list of available

devices with the term (

WPS available

) below their name.

Changing Your Settings 325

To pair your device using WPS:

1. Follow the WPS activation instructions specific to your Wireless

Access Point.

2. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Wi-Fi.

3. Press then tap

WPS push button

4. Once the connection is complete, confirm the external router

now appears in the Wi-Fi list as connected.

WPS PIN Entry

If a WPS Push Button does not work, there is an alternative WPS

connection method where you would use a device generated PIN

number to establish the connection. This number is then entered into

your WAP’s WPS client PIN field to complete the connection.

To pair your device using WPS PIN:

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Wi-Fi.

2. Press then tap

WPS PIN entry

3. Write down the generate PIN number and enter it into your

Wi-Fi Router’s client PIN field.

4. Once the connection is complete, confirm the external router

now appears in the Wi-Fi list as connected.

326

Wi-Fi Direct Setup and Settings

You can configure your device to connect directly with other Wi-Fi

capable devices. This is an easy way to transfer data between

devices. These devices must be enabled for Wi-Fi direct

communication. This connection is direct and not via a HotSpot or

WAP.

Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and configured for a

direct connection to another compatible device in the

same direct communication mode.

Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and

communicating.

Note:

Activating this feature will disconnect your current Wi-Fi

network connection.

To activate your connection:

1. From the main

Settings

page, touch and slide the

Wi-Fi

slider

to the right to turn it on. The slider color indicates the

activation status.

2. Tap

Wi-Fi Direct

3. Tap

Scan

and select the single device name to begin the

connection process to another Wi-Fi Direct compatible device.

– or –

Tap

Multi-connect

➔

Scan

and select all the device names to

begin the connection process to these Wi-Fi Direct compatible

devices.

Changing Your Settings 327

4. The target device is notified of the connection attempt via an

on-screen Invitation to connect popup. Tap

to complete

the connection.

Note:

The target device must also have Wi-Fi Direct service active and

running before it can be detected by your device.

5. Tap

Done

. The direct connection is then established. Confirm

appears in the Status bar.

Bluetooth settings

In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a device

name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices can discover

it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices with which to pair.

For more information, refer to “Bluetooth” on page 307.

Turning Bluetooth On and Off

To turn Bluetooth on:



From the main

Settings

page, in a single motion touch and

slide the

Bluetooth

slider to the right to turn it on.

The slider color indicates the activation status. When active,

displays in the Status area.

To turn Bluetooth off:



From the main

Settings

page, in a single motion touch and

slide the

Bluetooth

slider to the left to turn it off.

Note:

Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use.

328

Activating the Device Name

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Bluetooth

2. Verify Bluetooth is active (indicated by ).

3. Press and tap the

Rename device.

The assigned device

name displays.

4. Tap to erase the current device name and enter a new

name for this device using the keyboard.

5. Tap

to confirm your setting.

Activating Visibility

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Bluetooth

2. Verify your Bluetooth is active.

3. From the top of the Bluetooth settings page, toggle the state of

the visibility check mark. Activating this feature enabled your

device visible allows other devices to pair and communicate.

Scanning for Devices

This option allows you to scan for active Bluetooth devices so you

can pair with them.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Bluetooth

2. From the bottom of the Bluetooth settings page, tap

Scan

search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices such

as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.

Important!

Some Bluetooth devices are secured and require a PIN

number to confirm and pair with them.

Changing Your Settings 329

3. Enter a PIN to pair with the device, if one is required, and tap

Data Usage

Monitor and mange your device’s data usage capabilities.

Features include activation/deactivation or network data usage, set

mobile data usage for a set period of time, and view application data

usage.



From the main

Settings

page, tap

Data usage

To activate/deactivate Mobile data usage:

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Data usage

2. Tap the

Mobile data

field to activate the feature. A green

checkmark indicates the feature is active.

3. Tap the

Mobile data

field again to deactivate the feature.

To set a mobile data limit:

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Data usage

2. Place a check mark in the

Set mobile data limit

field.

3. Read the on-screen disclaimer info and tap

4. Touch and drag the far right ends of the Red or Orange

horizontal lines to manually adjust both the Warning and

Maximum data limits.

5. Touch and drag the bottom grey vertical lines to adjust the time

frames.

6. Tap the

Data usage cycle

button and select either the current

cycle or define your own by selecting

Change cycle

330

7. Press and then select from the available on-screen

options:

• Restrict background data

prevents background data usage. This can

help prevent over usage of your data minutes.

• Auto sync data

allows the device to automatically sync information and

updates with your various services.

•Show Wi-Fi usage

activates an additional Wi-Fi tab that shows you your

Wi-Fi data usage.

More Settings

This tab displays additional wireless and network information.



From the main

Settings

page, tap

More settings

Using Airplane mode

This mode allows you to use many of your device’s features, such as

Camera, Games, and more, when you are in an airplane or in any

other area where making or receiving calls or data is prohibited.

Important!

When your device is in Airplane mode, it cannot send or

receive any calls or access online information or

applications.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

More settings

2. Tap

Airplane mode

. A check mark displayed next to the feature

indicates Airplane mode is active.

The Airplane mode icon is displayed at the top of your

screen.

Changing Your Settings 331

Mobile networks

Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your

location or search for places of interest, you must enable the Mobile

networks options.



From the main

Settings

page, tap

More settings

➔

Mobile

networks

The following options display:

Use mobile data

Allows you to activate mobile data usage on your device.



From the main

Settings

page, tap

More settings

➔

Mobile

networks

➔

Mobile data

VPN settings

The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Virtual

Private Networks (VPNs).

Note:

Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock PIN or

password. For more information, refer to “Security” on

page 371.

332

Adding a VPN

Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN protocol to

use: PPTP, L2TP/IPSec PSK, L2TP/IPSec RSA, IPSec Xauth PSK,

IPSec Xauth RSA, IPSec Hybrid RSA.

Important!

Before you can use a VPN you must establish and

configure one.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

More settings

➔

VPN

2. If prompted, read the screen lock information and follow the

on-screen steps to setup an unlock PIN or password.

3. Tap

Add VPN network

4. In the form that appears, fill in the information provided by

your network administrator.

5. Tap

Save

Note:

Similar setup process can be used for all available VPN types.

Connecting to a VPN

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

More settings

➔

VPN

2. Tap the VPN entry you want to connect to.

3. Enter any requested credentials into the pop-up that opens.

4. Tap

Connect

Changing Your Settings 333

Edit a VPN

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

More settings

➔

VPN

2. Touch and hold the VPN that you want to edit.

3. In the pop-up that opens, select

Edit network

4. Make the desired VPN setting changes.

5. Tap

Save

Delete a VPN

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

More settings

➔

VPN

2. Touch and hold the VPN that you want to delete.

3. Tap

Delete network

within the pop-up that opens up.

Near Field Communication

This feature is used to read and exchange tags. When used in

conjunction with Android Beam, your device can be used to beam

application content when NFC-capable devices are touched.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

More settings

2. Tap the

NFC

field and drag the activation slider to the on

position.

Note:

Enabling NFC also enables Android Beam.

NFC can now be used to automatically connect to AllShare Cast.

334

S Beam

This feature (when activated via NFC) allows you to beam large files

directly to another compatible device that is in direct contact. These

files can be larger, such as Videos, HD pictures, and other large

files.You can beam images and videos from your gallery, music files

from your music player, and more.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

More settings

2. Verify the NFC feature is active.

3. Tap

S Beam

and make sure the feature is turned on.

4. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide the

Beam

slider to the right to turn it on.

5. Complete the transfer process between the two

NFC-enabled devices by placing them back to back.

This feature can come in very handy to quickly share pictures

between users with compatible S Beam devices.

Changing Your Settings 335

Nearby devices

This option allows you to share your media files with nearby devices

using DLNA and connected to the same Wi-Fi.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

More settings

➔

Nearby

devices

2. Verify Wi-Fi Direct is enabled and you are paired with the

device you wish to detect and share content with.

3. In a single motion, place a checkmark in the

File sharing

field.

4. Verify (

Nearby devices

) appears at the top of the screen.

5. At the Nearby devices prompt, tap

6. Tap

Shared contents

, then check the media you would like to

share. Tap

7. Tap

Device name

, then use the on-screen keyboard to change

the name shown to others. Tap

Save

8. Tap

Allowed devices list

, then select the connected devices you

would like to allow.

9. Tap

Not-allowed devices list

, then select the connected devices

you would like to not allow.

10. Tap

Download to

, then select the destination of any

downloaded (shared) content. Choose from Device (phone) or

SD card.

11. Tap

Upload from other devices

, then select the actions you’ll

take when you upload content from other devices. Choose

from either Always accept, Always ask, or Always reject.

336

AllShare Cast

With AllShare Cast, you can wirelessly mirror what is currently

displayed on your device’s screen with an external TV via the

AllShare Cast Hub®.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

More settings

➔

AllShare

Cast

2. In a single motion touch and slide the

AllShare Cast

slider to

the right to turn it on. The slider color indicates the activation

status.

Note:

This feature allows a connection between your device and the

optional AllShare Cast Hub, via a shared Wi-Fi Direct

connection. The AllShare Cast Hub then allows the

communicating TV to mirror what is being shown on the

device's display.

Kies via Wi-Fi

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

More settings

2. Tap

Kies via Wi-Fi

➔

3. Select a network connection and follow the on-screen

connection process.

Refer to the Kies Air process information for more information.

Changing Your Settings 337

Call Settings

To access the Call settings menu:

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Phone

2. Press and then tap

Call settings.

Configuring General Call Settings

Configure the general call settings using this option.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Phone

2. Press and then tap

Call settings.

3. Tap one of the following options:

•Call restriction

: allows you to manage your rejection mode and rejection

list.

–

Auto reject mode

: sets the phone to automatically reject incoming calls

or messages.

–

Auto reject list

: provides access to current rejection entries and

numbers.

• Set reject messages

: allows you to manage both existing rejection

messages and create new ones.

• Ringtones and keypad tones

: allows you to manage your Device

ringtone, Device vibration, Incoming call vibration and Keytones settings.

• Call alert

: allows you to assign call alert tones and activate call alerts

and vibration.

–

Call vibrations

: vibrates the phone when the called party answers.

–

Call status tones

: assigns sounds settings during the call. Choose from:

Call connect tone, Minute minder, and Call end tone.

338

–

Alerts on call

: selects whether alarm and message notification is turned

off during a call.

• Call answering/ending

: allows you to manage the settings for

answering and ending calls.

–

Answering key

allows you to press a key to answer the phone.

–

Answer calls using voice

allows you to answer an incoming call using

a voice command.

–

The power key ends calls

allows you to press the power key to end the

current call.

• Auto screen off during calls

: allows you to force the screen to turn off

during an active call.

• Accessory settings for call

: allows you to assign headset settings

during incoming calls.

–

Automatic answering

configures the device to automatically answer

and incoming call when a headset is detected.

–

Automatic answering timer

configures the time delay before the

device automatically accepts the incoming call.

–

Outgoing call conditions

configures the connected Bluetooth device to

make outbound calls within one of two settings: Even when device locked

or Only when device unlocked.

• My call sound

: allows you to personalize the sounds you hear during a

call with and without earphones.

–

Tap

My call

sound settings

and select

Personalize call sound

–

Follow the detailed on-screen instructions.

Changing Your Settings 339

• Use extra vol. for calls

: activating this feature places an extra volume

button on your currently active call screen.

• Increase volume in pocket

: increases the ringtone volume when the

device is in a pocket or a bag. Uses the proximity sensor to detect its

location.

• Additional settings

: allows you to configure additional call settings.

For more information, refer to

“Configuring Additional Voice Call

Settings”

on page 343.

• Voicemail service

: allows you to assign the service.

• Voicemail settings

: displays the settings for the voicemail.

•Ringtone

: assigns your device’s ringtone.

•Vibrate

: configures the vibrate settings. Choose from Always, Only in

silent mode, or Never.

• US dialing

: replaces the “+” with a designated international dialing

prefix. For more information, refer to

“US and International Dialing”

on page 344.

–

Once

US dialing

is disabled, the International dialing field becomes

editable. Tap this filed and enter a new dialing prefix, then tap

• TTY mode

: allows you to configure the TTY settings. For more

information, refer to

“TTY Mode”

on page 345.

•DTMF tones

: allows you to set the lengths of DTMF tones. For more

information, refer to

“DTMF Tones”

on page 345.

• Voice privacy

: allows you to enable/disable an enhanced privacy mode.

The Voice Privacy option automatically reduces the sound of the

incoming caller’s voice for enhanced privacy. For more information, refer

“Voice Privacy”

on page 346.

340

Call restriction

1. From the main

Call settings

page, tap

Call restriction

2. Activate the feature by moving the

Auto reject mode

slider to

the on position.

3. Tap

Auto reject mode

and tap one of the following options:

• All numbers

: to reject all calls.

• Auto reject numbers

: to reject all calls in your Reject list.

4. Tap

Auto reject list

5. Tap to manually add numbers to the Reject list.

6. Tap

Unavailable

to create a checkmark and automatically reject

all calls that are not in your Contacts list.

Set reject messages

1. From the main

Call settings

page, tap

Set reject messages

2. Tap to manually add a reject message.

– or –

Tap one of the pre-written messages to be displayed when you

want the call to be rejected. You can edit the message if

desired.

•

Tap

Save

to save the reject message.

Changing Your Settings 341

Ringtones and keypad tones

1. From the main

Call settings

page, tap

Call settings

➔

Ringtones

and keypad tones

2. Tap

Device ringtone

, select a ringtone, and tap

3. Tap

Device vibration

, select a vibration type, and tap

4. Tap

Incoming call vibration

to create a checkmark if you want

your phone to vibrate when a call is incoming.

5. Tap

Keytones

to create a checkmark if you want tones to play

when the keypad is pressed.

Call alert

1. From the main

Call settings

page, tap

Call alert

2. Tap

Call vibrations

to enable your phone to vibrate when the

called party answers the phone.

3. Tap

Call status tones

to set the sound settings during a call

then tap

4. Tap

Alerts on call

to turn off alarm and message notifications

during a call.

Call answering/ending

1. From the main

Call settings

page, tap

Call settings

➔

Call

answering/ending

2. Select any of the following options:

• Answering key

: Tap this option to be able to accept incoming calls by

pressing the Home key.

• Answer calls using voice

: Allows you to answer an incoming call using

a voice command.

342

• The power key ends calls

: This option will allow you to end a call by

pressing the power key without turning off the screen.

Auto screen off during calls

This option turns on the proximity sensor during calls so that your

phone will know to turn the screen off to save power.



From the main

Call settings

page, tap

Auto screen off during

calls

to create a checkmark and enable the feature.

Accessory settings for call

1. From the main

Call settings

page, tap

Accessory settings for

call

2. The following options are available:

• Automatic answering

: configures the device to automatically answer

and incoming call when a headset is detected.

• Automatic answering timer

: configures the time delay before the

device automatically accepts the incoming call.

• Outgoing call conditions

: allows you to make calls even when the

device is locked.

My call sound

This option allows you to personalize the sounds you hear during a

call with and without earphones.

1. From the main

Call settings

page, tap

Call settings

➔

My call

sound

2. Tap

My call sound settings

3. Tap

Personalize call sound

and follow the detailed

on-screen instructions.

Changing Your Settings 343

Use extra vol. for calls

This option allows you to see an extra volume button on the screen

during calls.



From the main

Call settings

page, tap

Use extra vol. for calls

create a checkmark and enable the feature.

Increase volume in pocket

This option increases the ringtone volume when the device is in a

pocket or a bag. It uses the proximity sensor to detect its location.



From the main

Call settings

page, tap

Increase volume in

pocket

to create a checkmark and enable the feature.

Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings

1. From the main

Call settings

page, tap

Additional settings

2. Tap one of the following options:

•Noise reduction

: suppresses background noise on your side of the

conversation during an active call.

Voicemail

You can view your voicemail number from this menu.

1. From the main

Call settings

page, tap

Voicemail service

2. Tap

My carrier

3. If an additional voicemail service is in use (other than carrier/

service provider), tap

Voicemail settings

to now view your

selected voicemail number and information.

344

Device Ringtone

This option allows you to assign a default ringtone when an incoming

voicemail message is received.

1. From the main

Call settings

page, tap

Ringtone

2. Select a ringtone and tap

Vibrate

This option allows you to activate a vibration when an incoming

voicemail message is received.

1. From the main

Call settings

page, tap

Vibrate

2. Select an available option. Choose from: Always, Only in Silent

mode, or Never.

US and International Dialing

Similar to prefix dialing, these two menus allow you to use either a

default “011” entry when using the “

” dialing shortcut, or replace it

with a new user-defined set of digits.

To dial a U.S. long distance code:

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Phone

2. Touch and hold to display “+” on-screen. This shortcut

uses the International dialing prefix entered into the

International dialing menu. The default is “011”.

To change the International dialing prefix:

1. From the main

Call settings

page, tap

Call settings

2. Remove the check from the

US dialing

field and then tap the

International dialing

field.



Changing Your Settings 345

3. Use the on-screen keypad to delete the current entry and

replace it with a new one. Tap

once complete.

TTY Mode

A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a

telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf, hard of

hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to

communicate by telephone.

Your device is compatible with select TTY devices. Please check with

the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it is compatible

with digital cell phones.

Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable that plugs

into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was not provided with

your TTY device, contact your TTY device manufacturer to purchase

the connector cable.

1. From the main

Call settings

page, tap

TTY mode

2. Tap

TTY Off

TTY Full

TTY HCO

TTY VCO

to activate the

feature, or

TTY Off

to deactivate the feature. Off is the default

setting.

DTMF Tones

DTMF tones are the sounds you hear when pressing each number a

touch-tone phone. The DTMF tones feature allows you to set the

length of time that you hear each tone when tapping a number on

the phone’s dialpad.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Phone

2. Press and then tap

Call settings

➔

DTMF tones

3. Choose from either

Normal

Long

346

Voice Privacy

The Voice Privacy option automatically reduces the sound of the

incoming caller’s voice for enhanced privacy.

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Phone

2. Press and then tap

Call settings

3. Tap the

Voice privacy

field to activate the feature

(a green checkmark appears in the adjacent field).

Home Screen Mode

This application allows you to set your display to the conventional

layout of

Standard mode

or provide an easier user experience for the

first-time smartphone users using

Starter mode

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap (

Home screen mode

2. Tap the pull-down dropbox and select one of the following

options:

• Standard mode

: provides conventional layout for the apps and widgets

on your home screens.

•Starter mode

: provides easier user experience for first-time smartphone

users on the home screens.

3. Tap

Apply

and give your device a few seconds to update the

device with the new look and feel.

Changing Your Settings 347

Sound Settings

From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone as well as

configure the display settings.



From the main

Settings

page, tap

Sound

The following options display:

Silent mode via Device Options Screen

Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone from

making noise, in a theater for example. In Silent Mode the speaker is

muted and the phone only vibrates to notify you of incoming calls, or

other functions that normally have a defined tone or sound as an

alert.

1. From the Home screen, press and hold (

Power/End

)

until

Device options

displays.

2. Tap

Mute

from the Device Options screen to activate or

deactivate this mode (the current mode displays).

Note:

Additional options include Vibrate and Sound.

348

Adjusting the Volume Settings

The Volume menu now provides access to various volume settings

within one on-screen popup menu.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Sound

➔

Volume

2. Touch and drag the on-screen slider to assign the volume

settings for any of the following volume levels.

• Music, video, games, and other media

Ringtone

Notifications

System

3. Tap

to assign the volume levels.

Vibration intensity

Vibration intensity allows you to select how intense the vibration is

for different options.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Sound

➔

Vibration intensity

2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the Vibration intensity for

Incoming call

Notification

, and

Haptic feedback

3. Tap

to assign the vibration levels.

Setup the Voice Call Ringtone

This option allows you to set the ringtone.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Sound

2. Tap

Device ringtone

3. Tap a ringtone from the available list. The ringtone briefly plays

when selected.

4. Tap

Add

to locate a compatible media file that can be used as a

ringtone.

5. Tap

to assign a ringer.

Changing Your Settings 349

Setup the Device Vibration

This option allows you to set your device to vibrate and ring.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Sound

2. Tap

Device vibration

3. Select a vibration pattern and tap

– or –

Tap

Create

to then use an on-screen touch circle to create your

own custom vibration pattern. Tap

Save

to store the new

vibration pattern.

Setting a Default Notification Ringtone

This option allows you to set the ringtone that will sound for

notifications and alarms.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Sound

➔

Default

notifications

2. Tap one of the ringtones and tap

Setting up Sound and Vibration

This option allows you to adjust the sound and vibration functions.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Sound

2. Tap the

Vibrate when ringing

field to activate the feature.

350

Audible System Tone Settings

These options are used when you use the dialing pad, make a

screen selection, lock your screen, or tap the screen. Each time you

press a key or make a selection the selected tone sounds.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Sound

2. Tap

Keytones

to activate a tone when you use on-screen keys.

A check mark displayed next to these features indicates active

status.

3. Tap

Touch sounds

to activate a tone when you touch the

screen. A check mark displayed next to this feature indicates

active status.

4. Tap

Screen lock sound

to activate a tone when you use the

Lock screen. A check mark displayed next to this feature

indicates active status.

5. Tap

Haptic feedback

to activate the a vibration when you press

soft keys on certain screens. A check mark displayed next to

the feature indicates this feature is active.

6. Tap

Auto haptic

to enable the ability of the device to vibrate

automatically in response to sounds of downloadable apps.

7. Tap

Emergency tone

to set the notification for emergency

events to either: Off, Alert, or Vibrate.

Changing Your Settings 351

Display Settings

In this menu, you can change various settings for the display such as

the font, orientation, pop-up notifications, puzzle lock feature,

animation, brightness, screen timeout, and power saving mode.

Adjusting the Screen Display

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Display

2. Configure the following screen display settings:

• Wallpaper

: allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home screen, Lock

screen, or both.

•LED indicator

: allows you to turn on your LED lights for charging, low

battery, incoming notifications, and voice recording. The light will turn on

by default unless you turn them off.

•Multi window

: tap this option to enable/disable the automatic

Multi window feature.

Note:

For more information on the Multi window feature, refer to

"Using the Multi Window" on page 61.

• Page buddy

: allows context related pages to be created on the Home

screen. You can select Earphones page, Docking page, and Roaming

page. Tap Page buddy help for more information.

•Brightness

: adjusts the on-screen brightness level. For more

information, refer to

“Adjusting Screen Brightness”

on page 353.

• Auto-rotate screen

: when enabled, the phone automatically switches

from portrait to landscape orientation and vice versa. When this setting is

disabled, the phone displays in portrait mode only.

352

•Screen timeout

: adjusts the delay time before the screen automatically

turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes,

5 minutes, and 10 minutes.

• Smart rotation

: disables the auto screen rotation by checking the

orientation of your face and the device.

•Smart stay

: tap this option to disable the screen timeout if your device

detects that your face is watching the screen.

• Font style

: sets the fonts used on the LCD display. Selections are:

Default font

Choco cooky

Helvetica S

Rosemary

, or

Get fonts

online

. Tap

Get fonts online

to download additional fonts.

•Font size

: allows you to select which size of font is displayed.

• Touch key light duration

: to adjust the light duration of the touch keys.

• Display battery percentage

: to activate/deactivate the display of

battery charge percentage atop the battery icon at the top of the screen.

• Auto adjust screen tone

: adjusts the phone’s LCD brightness level to

automatically adjust and conserve battery power.

Changing Your Settings 353

Adjusting Screen Brightness

This feature configures the LCD Brightness levels.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Display

➔

Brightness

2. Tap

Automatic brightness

to allow the phone to self-adjust and

tap

– or –

Touch and slide the on-screen slider to adjust the level and tap

Assigning a Wallpaper

The Wallpaper settings option allows you to set the Wallpaper for

your Home screen, Lock screen, or both.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Display

➔

Wallpaper

2. Select an available option to change its current wallpaper.

For more information, refer to “Managing Wallpapers” on page 77.

LED Indicator

This option allows you to turn on your LED lights for charging,

missed events, and incoming notifications. The light will turn on by

default unless you turn them off.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Display

➔

LED indicator

2. Tap the following LED indicator options to turn them on or off:

•Charging

: LED lights up when the device is connected to the charger.

• Low battery

: LED lights up when the battery level is low.

• Notifications

: LED lights up when you have missed calls, messages, or

application events.

354

• Voice recording

: LED lights up when you are recording voice. The LED

only lights up when the screen is off.

SD Card & Device Storage

From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the memory

card as well as mount or unmount the SD card.

•

microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 4GB.

•

microSDHC™ memory card types can range from 4GB to up to 32GB.

•

microSDXC™ memory card types can include capacities greater than

32GB.

To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:



From the main

Settings

page, tap

Storage

The available memory displays under the Total space and SD

card headings.

Important! DO NOT

remove a microSD card while the device is

accessing or transferring files. Doing so will result in loss

or damage of data. Make sure your battery is fully charged

before using the microSD card. Your data may become

damaged or lost if the battery runs out while you are using

the microSD card.

Changing Your Settings 355

Mounting the SD Card

To store photos, music, videos, and other applications. You must

mount (install) the SD card prior to use. Mounting the SD card

establishes a USB connection with your computer.

Important!

You must enable USB storage to mount the SD card.

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

➔

Storage

2. Tap

Mount

SD card

Unmounting the SD card

Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to the SD

card while removing it from the slot.

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

➔

Storage

2. Tap

Unmount

SD card

➔

3. After the “

SD card will be unmounted

” message displays and

the

Mount SD card

now appears in the menu list, remove the

SD card. For more information, refer to “Removing the

microSD Memory Card” on page 13.

356

Erasing Files from the SD card

To erase files from the SD card using the device:

1. Ensure the SD card is mounted. For more information, refer to

“Unmounting the SD card” on page 355.

2. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

➔

Storage

➔

Mount SD card

3. Tap

Format SD card

➔

Format SD card

➔

Delete all

to format

the SD card. The SD card formats and erases all the data

stored on it.

Power Saving Mode

This feature allows you both automatically set the phone to use a

power saving mode and configure additional power saving options

manually, all in an effort to conserve battery power.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Power saving mode

2. In a single motion touch and slide the slider to the right to turn

it on.

3. Tap the following options to create a check mark and conserve

power:

• CPU power saving

: allows you to limit the maximum performance of the

CPU.

• Screen power saving

: allows you to lower the screen power level.

• Background color

: allows you to change the background color on email

and internet to save power.

• Turn off haptic feedback

: allows you to turn off vibration when you tap

or touch the screen.

Changing Your Settings 357

4. Tap

Learn about power saving

to learn about various ways to

conserve battery power.

5. When the power gets low, confirm appears at the top of

the screen. This indicates the power saving mode is active.

Battery Usage

This option allows you to view a list of those components using

battery power. The amount of time the battery was used also

displays. Battery usage displays in percentages per application.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Battery

. The battery level

displays in percentage.

2. From the upper-right tap (

Refresh

) to update the list.

– or –

Tap an entry to view more detailed information.

Note:

Other applications may be running that affect battery use.

358

Application Manager

This device can be used for Android development. You can write

applications in the SDK and install them on this device, then run the

applications using the hardware, system, and network. This feature

allows you to configure the device for development.

Warning!

Because the device can be configured with system software

not provided by or supported by Google or any other

company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk.

This menu allows you to manage installed applications. You can view

and control currently running services, or use the device for

application development.

You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as well

as the remaining memory and resources for each of the applications

on your phone and clear the data, cache, or defaults.



From the main

Settings

page, tap

Application manager

➔

ALL

Clearing Application Cache and Data

Important!

You must have downloaded applications installed to use

this feature.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Application manager

2. Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data.

3. Tap

Force stop

Uninstall, Disable, Clear data

Clear cache

, or

Clear defaults

Changing Your Settings 359

Uninstalling Third-party Applications

Important!

You must have downloaded applications installed to use

this feature.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Application manager

2. Tap the

DOWNLOADED

tab and select your desired application.

3. Tap

Uninstall

(from within the top area of the Application info

page).

4. At the prompt, tap

to uninstall the application.

5. Select a reason for uninstalling the application, then tap

Running Services

The Running services option allows you to view and control currently

running services such as Backup, Hangouts, SNS (messaging),

Swype, and more.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Application manager

2. Tap the

RUNNING

tab to view all currently active and running

applications. This tab also shows the total RAM being used by

these currently active applications.

3. Tap a process and select

Stop

to end the process and stop it

from running. When you stop the process the service or

application will no longer run until you start the process or

application again.

4. Tap

Show cached processes

to view additional cached

applications.

360

Important!

Stopping a process might have undesirable consequences

on the application.

Storage Used

This option allows you to view a list (on the current tab) of current

applications as sorted by size.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Application manager

2. Tap the

ALL

tab to display all available applications.

3. Press and then tap

Sort by size

to change the current list

to show items based on the amount of storage they occupy.

Location Services

The Location services allows you to configure the device’s location

services.

Important!

The more location determining functions are enabled, the

more accurate the determination will be of your position.

Using Wireless Networks

Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your

location or search for places of interest, you must enable the Use

wireless networks option.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Location services

2. Tap

Use wireless networks

allows apps to use data from

sources such as Wi-Fi and mobile networks to provide a better

approximation of your current location.

Changing Your Settings 361

Enabling the GPS Satellites

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Location services

2. Tap

Use GPS satellites

to enable the GPS satellite.

Enabling the Location and Google Search

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Location services

2. Tap

Location and Google search

to enable the GPS satellite.

Tip:

When using Google Maps you can turn on

Location and Google

. Enabling this feature allows you to locate places of

interest at the street-level. However, this also requires a clear

view of the sky and uses more battery power.

Lock Screen

This menu contains features that allows you to configure the

device’s security parameters.

Screen Unlock Pattern Overview

To secure data and limit phone access, set the phone to require a

screen unlock pattern each time you turn on the device, or every

time the phone wakes up from sleep mode (when the screen

automatically turns off).

The Screen lock menu allows to choose from a variety of locking

features such as:

Swipe

Motion, Face unlock

Face and voice

Pattern

Password

, or

None

362

Using Swipe

This feature is the least secure locking method and only requires

that a user swipe the screen to unlock the device.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Lock screen

2. Tap

Screen lock

➔

Swipe

Using a Motion to Unlock

This feature allows you to lock or unlock your device by simply tilting

it and moving it either forwards or backwards.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Lock screen

2. Tap

Screen lock

➔

Motion

➔

To unlock a device with motion:

1. Verify the device is on and on the Lock screen.

2. In a single motion, use your thumb to touch and hold the Lock

screen, then quickly tilt the device towards you.

Note:

If you forget, these instructions appear at the bottom of the Lock

screen.

Changing Your Settings 363

Using Face Unlock

This feature used facial recognition to unlock your phone. This

feature is less secure than PIN, Pattern, and Password locks and can

be bypassed by someone else who looks similar to you.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Lock screen

2. Tap

Screen lock

➔

Face unlock

3. Read the on-screen notification and tap

Set it up

4. Follow the on-screen instructions.

Using Face and Voice Unlock

This feature used facial recognition to unlock your phone. This

feature is less secure than PIN, Pattern, and Password locks and can

be bypassed by someone else who looks similar to you.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Lock screen

2. Tap

Screen lock

➔

Face and voice

3. Read the on-screen notification and tap

Set it up

4. Follow the on-screen instructions.

5. Once prompted to speak and unlock command, tap

and repeat the phrase four times.

6. Once complete, tap

Done

364

Setting an Unlock Pattern

Creating a screen unlock pattern increases security on the phone.

When you enable the User visible pattern field, you will draw an

unlock pattern on the screen whenever you want to unlock the

phone’s buttons or touch screen. When you activate the User tactile

feedback field, you feel vibration as feedback while drawing the

pattern.

The feature is now paired with a backup PIN code that acts as a

backup to the pattern lock. If you forget your pattern, you can regain

access to the device by entering a PIN code.

Note:

Make sure the Require Pattern field is activated.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Lock screen

2. Tap

Screen lock

➔

Pattern

3. Read the instructions then tap

4. Review the on-screen animation procedure for drawing a

pattern and tap

when you are ready to draw a pattern.

5. Draw your pattern by touching your first on-screen point. Then,

without removing your finger from the screen, drag your finger

over adjacent points until the gray trace line overlaps each point

and they are highlighted with a green circle.

6. When you have connected at least four dots in a vertical,

horizontal or diagonal direction, lift your finger from the screen

and tap

Continue

7. Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then tapping

Confirm

. The Unlock pattern is set.

Changing Your Settings 365

8. Enter the backup PIN code and tap

Continue

9. Reenter the PIN to reconfirm the previous entry and

tap

Changing the Screen Lock Pattern

This feature allows you to change the previously stored unlock

pattern and update it if necessary. This process is similar to

changing your password from time to time.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Lock screen

2. Tap

Screen lock

3. Retrace your current pattern on the screen.

4. Tap

Pattern

and repeat steps 3 - 7 from the previous section.

Deleting the Screen Lock Pattern

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Lock screen

2. Tap

Screen lock

3. Retrace your current pattern on the screen.

4. Tap

None

366

What If I Forget my Pattern?

If you forget your device's lock pattern, you can unlock your device

or reset it using your Google™ Account credentials. When you enter

the wrong unlock pattern too many times, you should see an option

at the bottom of the screen that says

Forgot pattern?

Follow these

steps to use either your PIN or email address.

Important!

You can only enter an incorrect lock pattern 5 times before

the device is locked.

Important!

If you are unsuccessful in retrieving your lock pattern or

unlocking your device, please contact T-Mobile for

assistance.

To unlock your device with a PIN code:

1. Tap

Forgot pattern?

(located at the bottom of the screen).

2. Scroll down and tap the

Type PIN code

field and use the on-

screen keypad to enter the backup PIN code you setup when

you created your lock pattern.

3. Tap

4. If you have forgotten your current pattern, tap

Pattern

from the

Screen unlock settings menu and follow the procedures

outlined in "Setting an Unlock Pattern" on page 364 to create

a new pattern.

Changing Your Settings 367

To unlock your device using your Google account:

1. Tap

Forgot pattern?

(located at the bottom of the screen).

2. Tap the

Username (email)

and

Password

fields, use the

on-screen keyboard to enter your Google Account credentials,

and tap

to complete the login process.

3. If you have forgotten your Google Account credentials, visit the

Google website to recover them. If you still cannot get your

Google Account credentials, contact your service provider for

additional options.

PIN Lock and Unlock

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Lock screen

2. Tap

Screen lock

➔

3. Enter a PIN number using the numeric keypad and touch

Continue

to confirm the password.

4. Confirm the PIN by re-entering it and tap

to confirm.

Your phone now requires you to enter this PIN number in order

to unlock the phone.

Password Lock and Unlock

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Lock screen

2. Tap

Screen lock

3. Tap

Password

4. Enter a password using the keypad and tap

Continue

confirm the password.

5. Confirm the password by re-entering it and tap

to confirm.

368

Samsung Unlock Options

Activate or deactivates various Unlock screen functions.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Lock screen

➔

Lock screen

options

2. Tap

Lock screen options

and choose from:

•Shortcuts

sets shortcuts to appear at the bottom of the Lock screen.

• Information ticker

sets the news and stock information ticker to appear

across the bottom of the Lock screen.

•Clock

allows you to display the digital clock while the Lock screen is

active. Enabled by default.

•Dual clock

displays a set of dual digital clock on the Lock screen while

you are traveling. Tap the entry to set your home city. This time zone

then becomes the time used by one of these on-screen clocks.

• Weather

displays the current area weather on the Lock screen.

Tap and set both the temperature units (F or C) and a refresh time.

• Ripple effect

activates/deactivates the ripple effect on the lock screen

when you tap it.

•Help text

shows help information on the Lock screen.

• Camera quick access

provides you with quick access to the camera

function from the Lock screen. When active, in a single motion.

• Wake up in lock screen

requires that you say a command to wake-up

S Voice.

• Set wake-up command

designates your S Voice wake-up commands.

Tap Wake-up S Voice and follow the on-screen prompts to create a new

verbal command.

Changing Your Settings 369

Note:

These options vary depending on the selected Lock settings.

Customizing Your Lock Screen Shortcuts

Your device also provides up to 4 application shortcuts that can be

used to quickly access an application right from the lock screen.

Important!

To use these shortcuts, your Screen Lock feature can only

be set to either Swipe or None.

To open a shortcut from the lock screen:



In a single motion, swipe your finger over the on-screen icon

and towards the top of your device. Your device will unlock and

you will be taken immediately to the application.

To edit these Lock screen shortcuts:

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Lock screen

➔

Lock screen

options

2. In a single motion touch and slide the

Shortcuts

slider to the

right to turn it on.

3. Tap the

Shortcuts

field to activate the menu.

4. Tap a shortcut icon you wish to replace.

5. From the select application menu, tap a replacement

application.

6. Press to return to the previous screen.

370

Using a Visible Pattern

When the

Make pattern visible

option is enabled, the device displays

the on-screen lock grid that is used for unlocking.

Note:

This option only appears when a screen lock option is active.

Locking Automatically

This option allows you to define the amount of time that must pass

before the device can automatically lock on its own.

Note:

This option only appears when a screen lock option is active.

Lock Instantly with Power Key

When enabled, the screen is automatically locked after pressing the

Power/Lock key.

Note:

This option only appears when a screen lock option is active.

Vibrate on Screen Tap

When enabled, you will feel vibration as feedback while drawing the

pattern, using a PIN or password lock.

Note:

This option only appears when a screen lock option is active.

Changing Your Settings 371

Owner Information

This option allows you to show user-defined information on the Lock

screen.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Lock screen

➔

Owner

information

2. Tap the

Show owner info on lock screen

checkbox to create a

checkmark if you want your owner information displayed.

3. Enter text that you would like displayed on your Lock screen.

4. Tap OK to save the new text and return to the previous screen.

Security

The Security settings allow you to determine the security level for

your device.

Encrypt Device

When enabled, this feature requires a numeric PIN or password to

decrypt your phone each time you power it on or encrypt the data on

your SD card each time it is connected:

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Security

2. Tap

Encrypt device

. For more information, read the displayed

help screen.

3. Tap

Encrypt external SD card

to enable the encryption on SD

card data that requires a password be entered each time the

microSD card is connected.

Tip:

Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent.

Encryption may take an hour or more.

372

Password Settings

When you create a phone password you can also configure the

phone to display the password as you type it instead of using an

asterisk (*).

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Security

2. Tap

Make passwords visible

to activate this feature.

Device Administration

Activating this feature allows Google to administrate your phone in a

way similar to IT security settings on a corporate PC. This would be

beneficial in the case that your phone was lost or stolen. The phone

could be “deactivated” or “restricted” (through administration) from

a remote location.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Security

2. Tap

Device administrators

to begin configuring this setting.

3. Select an administrator device and follow the prompts.

Unknown Sources

Before you can download a web application you must enable the

Unknown sources feature (enables downloading). Developers can

use this option to install non-Play Store applications.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Security

2. Tap

Unknown sources

to active this feature.

Note:

If you are notified that you can not download a Play Store

application because it comes from an “Unknown source”,

enabling this option corrects this issue.

Changing Your Settings 373

Credential Storage

This option allows certain applications to access secure certificates

and other credentials. Certificates and credentials can be installed to

the SD card and password protected.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Security

2. Tap

Trusted credentials

to display only trusted CA certificates. A

check mark displayed next to the feature indicates secure

credentials.

3. Tap

Install from device storage

to install encrypted certificates

from the USB Storage location.

4. Tap

Clear credentials

to clear the device (SD card or phone

memory) of all certificate contents and reset the credentials

password.

Language and Input Settings

This setting allows you to configure the language in which to display

the menus. You can also set on-screen keyboard options.



From the main

Settings

page, tap

Language and input

Language Settings

To set the language that the menus display on the phone:

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Language and input

➔

Language

2. Select a language and region from the list.

374

Choose Input Method

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Language and input

➔

Default

2. Select an input method.

– or –

From a screen where you can enter text, in a single motion,

touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the

screen to open the Notifications screen. Tap (

Choose

input method

) and select an available input method.

Swype Settings

To configure Swype settings:

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Language and input

➔

(adjacent to the

Swype

field).

2. Tap

Settings

to alter these parameters:

• Vibrate on keypress

: activates a vibration sensation as you enter text

using the keypad.

• Sound on keypress

: turns on sounds generated by the Swype

application.

• Pop-up on keypress

: turns on the display of characters above keys

when typing.

•Show complete trace

: once enabled, sets wether or not to display the

complete Swype path.

• Auto-correction

: automatically corrects typing mistakes.

• Auto-capitalization

: automatically capitalizes the first letter of a

sentence.

Changing Your Settings 375

•Auto-spacing

: automatically inserts a space between words. When you

finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start the next word.

• Next word prediction

: once enabled, predicts the next word in your text

string based on your current text entries.

•Show Voice key

: once enabled, shows an Voice to text key within the

on-screen keyboard.

3. Tap

My Words

to configure various Dictionary and Data

Management features.

• Backup & Sync

: when active, allows you to backup your Swype

dictionary and sync your Swype dictionary across multiple devices.

• Living Language

: allows you to automatically update Swype with

popular new words. Tap

to continue the process.

• Social integration

: allows you to log into the available social media

accounts to add help personalize your personal dictionary with

commonly used words or names from your available accounts. Choose

from the following social media types:

–

Facebook

: allows you to log into your current Facebook account from

where contact names are added to your Swype’s personal dictionary for

later use when you enter names into text fields. Helps recognize familiar

names.

–

Twitter

: allows you to sign into your existing Twitter account from where

names and words are added to your personal dictionary. Helps recognize

familiar names and words.

–

Gmail

: allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail account from where

existing contact information is added to your personal dictionary. Helps

recognize familiar names.

376

• Edit my dictionary

: allows you to edit your current personal Swype

dictionary.

• Clear language data

: allows you to delete all personal language data,

including your defined words.

• Contribute usage data

: when enabled, allows the Nuance

application

to collect usage data for better word predictions.

• Cellular data

: when enabled, activates cellular data usage by the Swype

application so it can receive program updates, language downloads, and

other related features via your existing data connection.

4. Tap

Languages

to activate and select the current text input

language. Default language is US English.

• Download languages

: allows you to download additional languages.

•

The

Active

field displays the current language.

5. Tap

Gestures

to view an on-screen reference page related to

Gesture usage.

6. Tap

Help

to review help information for the Swype functionality

and view information about the version.

7. Tap

Updates

to update the application if new software is

available.

Changing Your Settings 377

Samsung Keyboard Settings

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Language and input

➔

(adjacent to the

Samsung keyboard

field).

– or –

From within an active text entry screen, touch and hold

(

Input Methods

), drag across the icons, and select

(

Settings

) to reveal the

Samsung keyboard settings

screen.

2. Set any of the following options:

• Portrait keyboard types

allows you to choose a keyboard configuration

(Qwerty keyboard [default] or 3x4 keyboard).

• Input languages

sets the input language. Tap a language from the

available list. The keyboard is updated to the selected language.

•Predictive text

enables predictive text entry mode. This must be

enabled to gain access to the advanced settings. Touch and hold to

access the advanced settings.

• T9 Trace

like using Swipe, allows you to enter text by sliding your fingers

across the on-screen keyboard. This feature is optimized for use with the

on-screen QWERTY keyboard.

• Handwriting

allows you to configure the handwriting settings such as:

Recognition type, Recognition time, Pen thickness, Pen color, Gesture

guide, Tutorial, and About.

• Advanced

provides access to additional settings such as:

–

Auto capitalization

automatically capitalizes the first letter of the first

word in each sentence (standard English style).

378

–

Auto-punctuate

automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence by

tapping the space bar twice when using the on-screen QWERTY

keyboard.

–

Character preview

provides an automatic preview of the current

character selection within the text string. This is helpful when multiple

characters are available within one key.

–

Key-tap vibration

enables vibration feedback when you tap an

on-screen key.

–

Key-tap sound

enables auditory feedback when you tap an

on-screen key.

•Tutorial

launches a brief on-screen tutorial covering the main concepts

related to the Samsung keyboard.

• Reset settings

resets the keyboard settings back to their original

configuration.

Predictive Text - Advanced Settings

The predictive text system provides next-letter prediction and

regional error correction, which compensates for users pressing the

wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Language and input

➔

(adjacent to the

Samsung keyboard

field).

– or –

From within an active text entry screen, touch and hold

(

Input Methods

), drag across the icons, and select

(

Settings

) to reveal the

Samsung keyboard settings

screen.

Changing Your Settings 379

2. In a single motion touch and slide the

Predictive text

slider to

the right to turn it on.

3. Tap the

Predictive text

field and configure any of the following

advanced options:

• Personalized data

activate this feature to use the personal language

data that you have entered and selected to make your text entry

prediction results better. By enabling this feature you can choose from

the following personalization features:

• Learn from Gmail

: allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail account

from where your style and existing contact information is added to your

personal dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names.

• Learn from Facebook

allows you to log into your current Facebook

account and add used text to your personal dictionary.

• Learn from Twitter

allows you to sign into your existing Twitter account

and add used text to your personal dictionary.

• Learn from Messaging

allows your device to learn your messaging

style by using your Messaging information.

• Learn from Contacts

updates predictive style by learning your Contacts

style.

• Clear personalized data

removes all personalized data entered by the

user.

4. Press to return to the previous screen.

380

Configure Google Voice Typing

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Language and input

– or –

From a screen where you can enter text, in a single motion,

touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the

screen, then select (

Choose input method

)

➔

Set up

input methods

2. Tap (adjacent to the

Google voice typing

field).

3. Select a language by tapping

Choose input languages

area.

4. Remove the check mark from the

Automatic

field. This allows

you to select additional languages.

5. Select the desired languages.

6. Activate

Block offensive words

to block recognition of known

offensive words or language. (A green check mark indicates

the feature is active).

7. Tap

Download offline speech recognition

to enable speech

recognition via locally stored files so that even if you are not

connected to a network you can still use the service.

Changing Your Settings 381

Configuring Voice Input Recognition

This feature allows the device to correctly recognize verbal input.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Language and input

2. Tap

Voice search

to configure the following:

• Language

: Choose a language for your voice input.

• Speech output

: Sets whether you will use speech output always or only

when using hands-free.

• Block offensive words

: Enable or disable blocking of recognized

offensive words from the results of your voice-input Google searches.

• Hotword detection

: enable to being able to launch voice search by

saying the word “Google”.

• Download offline speech recognition

: enables voice input while

offline.

• Personalized recognition

: enables the improvement of speech

recognition accuracy.

• Google Account dashboard

: allows you to manage your collected data.

• Bluetooth headset

: records audio through a connected Bluetooth

headset.

3. Press to return to the previous screen.

382

Configuring Text-to-speech

This feature allows the device to provide a verbal readout of

on-screen data such as messages and incoming caller information.

This action is called TTS (Text To Speech).

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Language and input

➔

Text-to-speech output

2. Select a current Preferred TTS engine from the list of available

options. Select

Google Text-to-speech Engine

Samsung TTS

The default is Google Text-to-speech.

3. Tap to configure the engine’s settings.

• Language

: allows you to set the language for spoken text.

• Settings for Google Text-to-speech Engine

: allows you to view Open

Source Licenses. Options include: Language, Settings for Google Text-

to-speech Engine, and Install voice data.

• Settings for Samsung TTS

: allows you to configure the General settings

for the Samsung TTS. Options include: Language and Settings for

Samsung TTS.

• Install voice data

: allows you to install voice data for speech synthesis.

4. Configure the General options to alter the settings associated

with this feature:

• Speech rate

: adjusts the rate at which on-screen text is spoken by the

device. Choose from:

Very slow

Slow

Normal

Fast

, and

Very fast

• Listen to an example

: plays a short example of what the text-to-speech

feature sounds like on your device when activated.

• Driving mode

: incoming calls and new notifications are automatically

read out loud. In a single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on.

Changing Your Settings 383

–

Once active, tap the Driving mode field to reveal the associated settings.

–

Select those applications that will use TTS while driving mode is activated.

Choose from: Incoming call, Message, New emails, New voicemail,

Alarm, Schedule, or Unlock screen.

Configuring the Mouse-TrackPad

This feature allows you to configure the pointer speed for a

connected mouse or trackpad.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Language and input

➔

Pointer speed

2. Adjust the slider and tap

Back up and Reset

Location settings, backup configurations, or reset the phone to erase

all personal data.



From the main

Settings

page, tap

Back up and reset

Mobile Backup and Restore

The device can be configured to back up your current settings,

application data and settings.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Back up and reset

2. Tap

Back up my data

to create a backup of your current phone

settings and applications.

3. Tap

Backup account

to assign the account being backed up.

4. Tap

Automatic restore

to assist in the re-installation of a

previously installed application (including preferences and

data).

384

5. Tap

Factory data reset

to reset your device and sound settings

to the factory default settings. For more information, refer to

“Factory Data Reset” on page 384.

Prior to doing a Factory Reset

Before initiating a factory reset, it is recommended that you backup

your personal data prior to use.

To export a Contact list to your microSD card:

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Contacts

2. Press and then tap

Import/Export

3. Tap

Export to SD card

➔

Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card:

1. From the Home screen, tap (

Apps

)

➔ (

Gallery

2. Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos.

3. Remove both the back cover and remove the internal microSD

card prior to initiating the process.

Factory Data Reset

From this menu you can reset your device and sound settings to the

factory default settings.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Back up and reset

➔

Factory

data reset.

2. Read the on-screen reset information.

3. Tap

Reset

device.

4. If necessary, enter your password and tap

Delete all

The device resets to the factory default settings automatically

and when finished displays the Home screen.

Changing Your Settings 385

Add Account

This menu allows you to set up, manage, and synchronize accounts,

including your Google and email accounts.

Adding an Account

1. From the main

Settings

page, navigate to the

Accounts

area.

2. Tap

Add account

and select one of the account types.

3. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your

credentials and set up the account.

4. A green circle will appear next to the account type once you

have created an account. Your email account will also be

displayed in the

Accounts

section of the main Settings menu.

Removing an Account

Important!

Removing an account also deletes all of its messages,

contacts, and other data from the device.

1. From the main

Settings

page, navigate to the

Accounts

area.

2. Tap the account name.

3. From the Accounts area of the screen, tap the account entry.

4. Tap

Remove account

, then tap

Remove

account

at the prompt to

remove the account and delete all its messages, contacts, and

other data.

386

Synchronizing a Accounts

By default, all managed accounts are synchronized. You can also

manually sync all current accounts.

1. From the main

Settings

page, navigate to the

Accounts

area.

2. Tap the account name.

3. Tap the account name.

4. Tap

Sync now

to synchronize your account or tap

Sync all

synchronize all your accounts. Tap

Cancel sync

to stop the

synchronization.

5. Tap

Settings

to access your account settings.

Motion Settings

This feature allows you to assign specific functions to certain phone

actions that are detected by both the accelerometer and gyroscope.

To activate motion:

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Motion

2. In a single motion touch and slide the

Motion

slider to the right

to turn it on.

Note:

If Motion activation is not enabled, all motion services are

greyed-out and disabled.

To activate different motion functions:



Tap the

Motion activation

field and activate the desired

on-screen motion option.

• Direct call

: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently displayed

on-screen Contact entry as soon as you place the device to your ear.

Changing Your Settings 387

•Smart alert

: Once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and notified

of you have missed any calls or messages.

• Double tap to top

: Once enabled, double tap the top of the device to be

taken to the top of the current on-screen list.

• Tilt to zoom

: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where content

can be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two points on the

display then tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out.

• Pan to move icon

: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired application

shortcut icon or widget on the screen. Once it detaches, move the

device left or right to migrate it to a new location.

• Pan to browse images

: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired on-

screen image to pan around it. Move the device left or right to pan

vertically or up and down to pan horizontally around the large on-screen

image.

• Shake to update

: Once enabled, shake your device to rescan for

Bluetooth devices, rescan for Wi-Fi devices, Refresh a Web page, etc.

• Turn over to mute/pause

: Once enabled, mute incoming calls and any

playing sounds by turning the device over display down on a surface.

This is the opposite of the pickup to be notified gesture.

• Sensitivity settings and tutorial

: Allows you to access the sensitivity

settings for the currently active gesture (page 388).

• Learn about motions

: Provides on-screen descriptions for the motion

functionality.

388

• Palm swipe to capture

: Once enabled, you can capture any

on-screen information swiping across the screen. In a single motion,

press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe form left to right.

The image is then copied to the clipboard.

• Palm touch to mute/pause

: Once enabled, you can pause any on-

screen video or mute any current sound by simply covering the screen

with your hand. Once you remove your hand from the screen, the device

goes back to normal by either continuing to play the current video or

unmuting the current sound.

• Learn about hand motions

: Provides on-screen descriptions for the

Palm to swipe and Palm touch to mute/pause functionality.

To adjust gesture sensitivity:

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Motion

➔

Sensitivity

settings

2. Tap an available field to access the sensitivity settings for the

currently active gesture. Choose from:

• Gyroscope calibration

: Allows you to properly calibrate your device for

use with motion gestures.

• Tilt to zoom

: Allows you to zoom in or out when in the Gallery or

Internet.

• Pan to move icon

: Allows you to move an icon to another page.

• Pan to browse images

: Allows you to move around an image when

zoomed in.

Note:

Sensitivity settings are only accessible if the gesture is currently

active.

Changing Your Settings 389

Accessory

This menu allows you to assign external speakers when the device is

docked.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Accessory

2. Tap

Dock sound

to play sounds when inserting or removing the

phone from the dock.

3. Tap

Audio output mode

to use the external dock speakers when

the phone is docked.

4. Tap

Desk home screen display

to display the desk home screen

when the phone is docked.

5. Tap

Audio output

to set your Audio output to Stereo or

Surround.

390

Date and Time

This menu allows you to change the current time and date displayed.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Date and time

2. Tap

Automatic data and time

to allow the network set the date

and time.

Important!

Deactivate

Automatic data and time

to manually set the rest

of the options.

3. Tap

Set date

and use the plus or minus icons to set the

Month

Day

, and

Year

then tap

Set

4. Tap

Set time

and use the plus or minus icons, set

Hour

, and

Minute

. Tap

, then tap

Set

5. Tap

Automatic time zone

to allow the network set the time zone

information automatically.

6. Tap

Select time zone

, then tap a time zone.

7. Tap

Use 24-hour format

. If this is not selected the device

automatically uses a 12-hour format.

8. Tap

Select date format

and select the date format type.

Changing Your Settings 391

Accessibility Settings

This service lets you enable and disable downloaded accessibility

applications that aid in navigating your Android device, such as

TalkBack (uses synthesized speech to describe the results of

actions), KickBack (provides haptic feedback for actions), and

SoundBack (plays sounds for various actions). Also lets you enable

use of the power key to end calls.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Accessibility

Note:

Initially, it might be necessary to download accessibility

applications from the Play Store.

2. Select the

Auto-rotate screen

field to activate this feature

which automatically rotates an available screen.

3. Tap

Screen timeout

to timeout the accessibility feature after a

defined amount of time.

4. Tap

Lock automatically

to lock the screen automatically after a

selected amount of time.

Note:

The Lock automatically function is only available if your device

is already using the screen lock feature.

5. Select the

Speak passwords

field to activate this feature which

reads out password information.

6. Select

The

power key ends calls

field to activate this feature

which uses the to end any current calls.

392

7. Tap

Accessibility shortcut

to allow the accessibility shortcut

under the device options to be used by pressing and holding

the power key.

8. Tap

TalkBack

to activate the feature.

Note:

TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback to help

blind and low-vision users.

Important!

TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter, except

passwords, including personal data and credit card

numbers. It may also log your user interface interactions

with the device.

9. Tap the

Font size

field to change the size of the fonts used on

the device within menus, options, etc..

Choose from: Tiny, Small, Normal, Large, or Huge.

10. Tap the

Negative colors

field to reverse the display of

on-screen colors from White text on a Black background to

Black text on a White background.

11. Tap the

Text-to-speech output

field to configure the text to

speech configuration parameters.

12. Tap the

Enhance web accessibility

field to allow apps to install

scripts from Google that make their Web content more

accessible.

13. Tap the

Sound balance

field to control the sound balance of the

media player while connected earphones are in use.

Changing Your Settings 393

14. Tap the

Mono audio

field to enable stereo audio to be

compressed into a single mono audio stream for use with a

single earbud/earphone.

15. Tap the

Turn off all sounds

field to mute every sound made by

the device during taps, selections, notifications, etc..

16. Tap the

Tap and hold delay

field to select a time interval for this

action. Choose from: Short, Medium, or Long.

Developer Options

Use the Developer options to set options for application

development.

Important!

These features are used for development purposes only.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Developer options

2. The following options are available:

• Desktop backup password

: Allows you to protect your desktop with a

backup password ID.

•Stay awake

: with the Stay awake option enabled, your screen will never

sleep while you are charging the device.

• Protect SD card

: Requires apps to ask your permission before

accessing data on your SD card.

• USB debugging

: Allows debugging when the device is attached to a PC

by a USB cable.

• Allow mock locations

: Used by developers when developing location-

based applications.

394

• Select app to be debugged

: Allows developers to select a specific app

to debug.

• Wait for debugger

: Specified apps must have debugger attached

before executing.

• Show touches

: Displays touch interactions on the screen.

• Show pointer location

: Highlights the data that was touched on the

screen.

• Show layout boundaries

: Displays clip bounds, margins, etc.

• Show GPU view updates

: Flashes views inside windows when drawn

with GPU.

• Show screen updates

: Forces areas of the screen to flash as it is

updated.

• Window animation scale

: Configure the scale for animation (ranges

from off to 10x).

• Transition animation scale

: Configure the scale for transitioning when

using animation (ranges from off to 10x).

• Animator duration scale

: Configure the scale for duration when using

animation (ranges from off to 10x).

• Disable hardware overlays

: Assigns the work of rendering to the GPU.

• Force GPU rendering

: Uses a 2D acceleration in applications.

• Strict mode

: Makes the screen flash when applications perform long

operations on the main thread.

• Show CPU usage

: Screen highlights the current CPU usage.

• GPU rendering profile

: Allows you to set the adb shell to measure

rendering.

Changing Your Settings 395

• Enable traces

: Enables/disables on-screen tracing based on an

available parameter.

• Do not keep activities

: Destroys every activity as soon as the

application is closed.

• Limit background processes

: Sets the number of processes that can

run in the background.

•Show all ANRs

: Displays a prompt when applications running in the

background are not responding.

USB Debugging

When enabled, allows debugging when the device is attached to a

PC by a USB cable.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Developer options

2. Tap

USB debugging

to enable or disable the setting. When

enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.

Allowing Mock Locations

Note:

This feature is used for development purposes only.

If you are a developer who is testing a GPS applications using this

device, you can tell the device that the phone is at different GPS

locations. In other words, the phone is allowed to “mock” the

coordinates.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Developer options

2. Verify the

Developer options

are active.

3. Tap

Allow mock locations

to enable or disable the setting.

When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.

396

Desktop Backup Password

Protect the desktop with a backup password ID.

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Developer options

2. Verify the

Developer options

are active.

3. Tap

Desktop backup password

4. In the Settings screen, enter the current full backup password,

the new password for full backups, then enter the new

password again.

5. Tap

Set backup password

to save the password change.

Application Options

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

Developer options

2. Verify the

Developer options

are active.

3. Tap

Do not keep activities

to destroy every activity as soon as

the application is closed.

4. Tap

Limit background processes

to set the number of

processes that can run in the background. Options are:

Standard limit, No background processes, and 1 to 4

processes at most.

5. Tap

Show all ANRs

to display a prompt when applications

running in the background are not responding.

Changing Your Settings 397

About Device

This menu contains legal information, system tutorial information,

and other phone information such as the model number, firmware

version, baseband version, kernel version, and software build

number.

To access phone information:



From the main

Settings

page, tap

About device

. The following

information displays:

• Software updates

: allows you to connect to the network and upload any

new phone software directly to your device. The device automatically

updates with the latest available software when you access this option.

• Status

: displays the Battery status, Battery level (as a percentage),

Network, Signal strength, Mobile network type, Service state, Roaming,

Mobile network state, My phone number, MIN, PRL version, MEID, IP

address, Wi-Fi MAC address, Bluetooth address, Up time, and Device

status.

• Legal information

: This option displays information about Open source

licences, License settings, as well as Google legal information. This

information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal information

and facts as well as Google Terms of Service, Terms of Service for

Android-powered Phones, and much more pertinent information as a

reference.

Read the information and terms, then press to return to the

Settings menu.

398

Tip:

To find your device’s DivX® registration code and information

about registering your device to play DivX protected video, tap

License settings

➔

DivX® VOD

• Model number

: displays the device’s model number.

• Android version

: displays the firmware version loaded on this device.

• Baseband version

: displays the baseband version loaded on this

device.

• Kernel version

: displays the kernel version loaded on this device.

• Build number

: displays the software, build number.

• Hardware version

: displays the hardware version of this device.

Note:

Firmware, baseband, kernel and build numbers are usually used

for updates to the handset or support. For additional information

please contact your service representative.

System Updates

The System Update feature enables you to use your device to

connect to the network and upload any new software directly to your

device. The device automatically updates with the latest available

software when you access this option.

The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status

at a glance:

Displays when the System update feature is active.

Displays when the System update feature is in progress.

Changing Your Settings 399

To update your device:

1. From the main

Settings

page, tap

About device

➔

System

updates

2. Read the information screen and select

Check now

3. If an update is available, follow the on-screen instructions.

400

Section 11: Health and Safety

Information

This device is capable of operating in Wi-Fi

™

mode in the 2.4 and

5 GHz bands. The FCC requires that devices operating within 5.15-

5.25 GHz may only be used indoors, not outside, in order to avoid

interference with Mobile Satellite Services (MSS). Therefore, this

device is restricted from being used outdoors when operating in

frequencies between 5.15-5.25 GHz.

This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using

your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone” are used in

this section to refer to your phone.

Read this information before using

your mobile device

Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals

The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published

information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF) exposure

from wireless phones. The FDA publication includes the following

information:

Do cell phones pose a health hazard?

Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause

cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of scientific

evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems.

Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy. Over the

past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds of studies looking

at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy emitted by cell

phones. While some researchers have reported biological changes

associated with RF energy, these studies have failed to be

Health and Safety Information 401

replicated. The majority of studies published have failed to show an

association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell phone

and health problems.

The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the

microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at substantially

reduced time intervals when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high

levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure

to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no

known adverse health effects.

The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be

confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic

energy.

Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in

X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization is a

process where electrons are stripped away from their normal

locations in atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage

biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material.

The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy, including

both radio waves and microwaves, are not great enough to cause

ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore, RF energy is a type of

non-ionizing radiation. Other types of non-ionizing radiation include

visible light, infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of

electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies.

While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can

increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two areas of

the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly vulnerable to RF

heating because there is relatively little blood flow in them to carry

away excess heat.

402

Research Results to Date: Is there a connection between RF

and certain health problems?

The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In addition,

attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have shown a

connection have failed.

The scientific community at large therefore believes that the weight

of scientific evidence does not show an association between

exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones and adverse

health outcomes. Still the scientific community has supported

additional research to address gaps in knowledge. Some of these

studies are described below.

Interphone Study

Interphone is a large international study designed to determine

whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer. A

report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology (June,

2010) compared cell phone usage for more than 5,000 people with

brain tumors (glioma and meningioma) and a similar number of

healthy controls.

Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain

cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk of brain

cancer from using cell phones. For people with the heaviest use of

cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour per day, every day, for

over 10 years) the study suggested a slight increase in brain cancer.

However, the authors determined that biases and errors prevented

any conclusions being drawn from this data. Additional information

about Interphone can be found at

http://www.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/2010/pdfs/pr200_E.pdf.

Health and Safety Information 403

Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did not

answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional research is

being conducted around the world, and the FDA continues to monitor

developments in this field.

International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users (COSMOS)

The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health monitoring of a

large group of people to determine if there are any health issues

linked to long-term exposure to radio frequency energy from cell

phone use. The COSMOS study will follow approximately 300,000

adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional

information about the COSMOS study can be found at

http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html

Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio Frequency

Fields in Childhood and Adolescence (MOBI-KIDS)

MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship

between exposure to radio frequency energy from communication

technologies including cell phones and brain cancer in young people.

This is an international multi-center study involving 14 European and

non-European countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS

can be found at

http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/

view.php?ID=39.

Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) Program

of the National Cancer Institute

The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer statistics

in the United States to detect any change in rates of new cases for

brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk for brain cancer, rates

should go up, because heavy cell phone use has been common for

quite some time in the U.S. Between 1987 and 2005, the overall

404

age-adjusted incidence of brain cancer did not increase. Additional

information about SEER can be found at

http://seer.cancer.gov/

Cell Phone Industry Actions

Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory

actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a number

of steps, including the following:

•

Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF for the type

of signal emitted by cell phones;

•

Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user;

and

•

Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current information

on cell phone use and human health concerns.

The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting bodies such

as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), the

International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection

(ICNIRP), and others to assure that safety standards continue to

adequately protect the public.

Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other

Accessories

Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy

If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy (RF)

from cell phones - and at this point we do not know that there is - it

is probably very small. But, if you are concerned about avoiding even

potential risks, you can take a few simple steps to minimize your RF

exposure.

•

Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;

Health and Safety Information 405

•

Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your head

and the cell phone.

Hands-Free Kits

Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets and

various types of body-worn accessories such as belt-clips and

holsters. Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy

absorption from cell phones.

Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone is

held away from the head in the user's hand or in approved

body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in the U.S. are

required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when used

against the head and against the body.

Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions

from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free kits

reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for convenience and

comfort. They are also required by law in many states if you want to

use your phone while driving.

Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from RF

Radiation

Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions

from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories

which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce risks.

Some products that claim to shield the user from RF absorption use

special phone cases, while others involve nothing more than a

metallic accessory attached to the phone.

406

Studies have shown that these products generally do not work as

advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called “shields” may

interfere with proper operation of the phone. The phone may be

forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an increase in

RF absorption.

Children and Cell Phones

The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of cell

phones from RF exposure, including children and teenagers. The

steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to children and

teenagers as well.

•

Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;

•

Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the head

and the cell phone.

Some groups sponsored by other national governments have

advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones at all.

For example, The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom made

such a recommendation in December 2000. In this report, a group of

independent experts noted that no evidence exists that using a cell

phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their

recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly

precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any

health hazard exists.

Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various

sources can be obtained from the following organizations (updated

10/1/2010):

•

FCC RF Safety Program:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/.

Health and Safety Information 407

•

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):

http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html.

•

Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):

http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/

(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)

•

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):

http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/.

•

World Health Organization (WHO):

http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/.

•

International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:

http://www.icnirp.de.

•

Health Protection Agency:

http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/.

•

US Food and Drug Administration:

http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/

RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/

HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm.

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)

Certification Information

Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed

and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for Radio

Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.

These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the

recommendations of two expert organizations: the National Council

on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP) and the Institute of

408

Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). In both cases, the

recommendations were developed by scientific and engineering

experts drawn from industry, government, and academia after

extensive reviews of the scientific literature related to the biological

effects of RF energy.

The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones

employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption

Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF

energy by the human body expressed in units of watts per kilogram

(W/kg). The FCC requires wireless phones to comply with a safety

limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).

The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give

additional protection to the public and to account for any variations

in measurements.

SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions

accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest

certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR

is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR

level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum

reported value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at

multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach

the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station

antenna, the lower the power output of the phone.

Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public, it must

be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the SAR

limit established by the FCC. Tests for each model phone are

performed in positions and locations (e.g. at the ear and worn on the

body) as required by the FCC. For body-worn operation, this phone

Health and Safety Information 409

has been tested and meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used

with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the

mobile device a minimum of 1.0cm from the body.

Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF

exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an Equipment

Authorization for this mobile device with all reported SAR levels

evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines.

This mobile phone has a FCC ID number: A3LSCHI535 [Model

Number: SCH-S968C] and the specific SAR levels for this mobile

phone can be found at the following FCC website:

http://www.fcc.gov/

oet/ea/

The SAR information for this device can also be found on Samsung’s

website:

http://www.samsung.com/sar

SAR information on this and other model phones can be accessed

online on the FCC's website through

http://transition.fcc.gov/oet/

rfsafety/sar.html

. To find information that pertains to a particular

model phone, this site uses the phone FCC ID number which is

usually printed somewhere on the case of the phone. Sometimes it

may be necessary to remove the battery pack to find the number.

Once you have the FCC ID number for a particular phone, follow the

instructions on the website and it should provide values for typical or

maximum SAR for a particular phone. Additional SAR information can

also be obtained at

http://www.fcc.gov/encyclopedia/specific-absorption-rate-sar-cellular-

telephones

410

FCC Part 15 Information to User

Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned that

changes or modifications not expressly approved by Samsung could

void your authority to operate the device.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the

limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC

Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection

against harmful interference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy

and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,

may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a

particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful

interference to radio or television reception, which can be

determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is

encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the

following measures:

•

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

•

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

•

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to

which the receiver is connected.

•

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Health and Safety Information 411

Commercial Mobile Alerting System

(CMAS)

This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from

the Commercial Mobile Alerting System ("CMAS"; which may also be

known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network ("PLAN")). If your

wireless provider has chosen to participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are

available while in the provider's coverage area. If you travel outside

your provider's coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be

available. For more information, please contact your wireless

provider.

Smart Practices While Driving

On the Road - Off the Phone

The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of his

or her vehicle.

Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task should be

performed while driving whether it be eating, drinking, talking to

passengers, or talking on a mobile phone - unless the driver has

assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the secondary

task will not interfere with their primary responsibility.

Do not engage

in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to

take your eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that

your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes impaired

Samsung is committed to promoting responsible driving and giving

drivers the tools they need to understand and address distractions.

Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and their

accessories in the areas where you drive. Always obey them. The use

of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas. For

example, only hands-free use may be permitted in certain areas.

412

Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the call go

to voicemail when driving conditions require. Remember, driving

comes first, not the call!

If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these tips:

•

Use a hands-free device;

•

Secure your phone within easy reach;

•

Place calls when you are not moving;

•

Plan calls when your car will be stationary;

•

Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;

•

Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are driving and

will suspend the call if necessary;

•

Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;

Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an

automobile:

Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or near

the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law may permit

mounting this device only in specific locations in the automobile. Be

sure to consult the state and local laws or ordinances where you

drive before mounting this device in an automobile. Failure to comply

with these restrictions could result in fines, penalties, or other

damages.

Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the driver's

clear view of the street and traffic.

Health and Safety Information 413

Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web

browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.

Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video games while

operating a vehicle.

For more information, go to

http://www.ctia.org

Battery Use and Safety

Important! Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or

damage

. Most battery issues arise from improper handling

of batteries and, particularly, from the continued use of

damaged batteries.

•

Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise attempt to

change the form of your battery

. Do not put a high degree of pressure on

the battery. This can cause leakage or an internal short-circuit, resulting in

overheating.

•

Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.

Liquids

can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion. Even when the

phone appears to be dry and appears to operate normally, the circuitry

could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard. If the phone and/or battery

get wet, have them checked by your service provider or contact Samsung,

even if they appear to be working properly.

•

Do not place your battery in or near a heat source

. Excessive heating

can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the phone or the

battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery with an appliance or

heat source such as a microwave oven, hair dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid

leaving your phone in your car in high temperatures.

414

•

Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire

. The phone or the

battery may explode when overheated.

•

Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery

. Do not let leaking battery

fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For safe disposal

options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized service center.

•

Avoid dropping the cell phone

. Dropping the phone or the battery,

especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause damage to the phone

and battery. If you suspect damage to the phone or battery, take it to a

service center for inspection.

•

Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way

•

Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects

. Accidental

short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key, jewelry, clip,

or pen) causes a direct connection between the + and - terminals of the

battery (metal strips on the battery), for example when you carry a spare

battery in a pocket or bag. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the

battery or the object causing the short-circuiting.

Important!

Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and recharge your

battery only with Samsung-approved chargers which are

specifically designed for your phone.

WARNING!

Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may present a risk

of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard

. Samsung's warranty does

not cover damage to the phone caused by nonSamsung-approved

batteries and/or chargers.

Health and Safety Information 415

•

Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers

. Some

websites and second-hand dealers not associated with reputable

manufacturers and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even

counterfeit batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase

manufacturer or carrier-recommended products and accessories. If

unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible,

contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger.

•

Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and charging

devices could result in damage to the equipment and a possible risk

of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to serious injuries, damages to

your phone, or other serious hazard

Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling

Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its customers to

recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine Samsung accessories.

Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only

important for safety, it benefits the environment. Batteries must be

recycled or disposed of properly.

Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and

accessories may not be available in your area.

We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung mobile

device by working with respected take-back companies in every

state in the country.

Drop It Off

You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device and

batteries for recycling at one of our numerous Samsung

Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these locations may be

found at:

416

http://pages.samsung.com/us/recyclingdirect/

usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect_locations.jsp

Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted at

these locations for no fee.

Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or

batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations where

mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional information

regarding specific locations may be found at:

http://www.epa.gov/epawaste/partnerships/plugin/cellphone/index.htm

or at

http://www.call2recycle.org/

Mail It In

The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide Samsung

customers with a free recycling mailing label. Just go to

http://fun.samsungmobileusa.com/recycling/index.jsp

and follow the

instructions to print out a free pre-paid postage label and then

send your old mobile device or battery to the address listed, via

U.S. Mail, for recycling.

Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved recycler.

To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:

www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect

Or call, (877) 278-0799.

Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile devices

and batteries

Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance with local

regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these items in household

or business trash may be prohibited. Help us protect the

environment - recycle!

Health and Safety Information 417

Warning!

Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may

explode.

UL Certified Travel Charger

The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL safety

requirements. Please adhere to the following safety instructions per

UL guidelines:

FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY LEAD TO

SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE PROPERTY DAMAGE.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE

INSTRUCTIONS.

DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH AMERICA,

USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR OF THE PROPER

CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER OUTLET.

THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY

ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR

MOUNT POSITION.

Display / Touch-Screen

Please note the following information when using your mobile

device:

418

WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY

The display on your mobile device is made of glass or acrylic

and could break if your mobile device is dropped or if it

receives significant impact. Do not use if screen is broken or

cracked as this could cause injury to you.

WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A TOUCH-SCREEN

MOBILE DEVICE

If your mobile device has a touch-screen display, please note

that a touch-screen responds best to a light touch from the

pad of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive

force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch-screen

may damage the tempered glass surface and void the

warranty. For more information, please refer to the “Standard

Limited Warranty”.

GPS & AGPS

Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning

System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS uses

satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are subject to

changes implemented in accordance with the Department of

Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan (FRP).

Changes may affect the performance of location-based technology

on your mobile device.

Certain Samsung mobile devices can also use an Assisted Global

Positioning System (AGPS), which obtains information from the

cellular network to improve GPS performance. AGPS uses your

Health and Safety Information 419

wireless service provider's network and therefore airtime, data

charges, and/or additional charges may apply in accordance with

your service plan. Contact your wireless service provider for details.

Your Location

Location-based information includes information that can be used to

determine the approximate location of a mobile device. Mobile

devices which are connected to a wireless network transmit

location-based information. Additionally, if you use applications that

require location-based information (e.g. driving directions), such

applications transmit location-based information. The location-based

information may be shared with third-parties, including your wireless

service provider, applications providers, Samsung, and other

third-parties providing services.

Use of AGPS in Emergency Calls

When you make an emergency call, the cellular network may

activate AGPS technology in your mobile device to tell the emergency

responders your approximate location.

AGPS has limitations and

might not work in your area

. Therefore:

•

Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of your

ability; and

•

Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency responder

instructs you.

Navigation

Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data relating

to your current location, may contain inaccurate or incomplete data,

and circumstances can and do change over time. In some areas,

complete information may not be available. T

herefore, you should

always visually confirm that the navigational instructions are

420

consistent with what you see before following them. All users should

pay attention to road conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors

that may impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road

signs

Emergency Calls

This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates using

radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well as

user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee connection in

all conditions, areas, or circumstances.

Therefore, you should never rely solely on any wireless mobile

device for essential communications (medical emergencies, for

example). Before traveling in remote or underdeveloped areas, plan

an alternate method of contacting emergency services personnel.

Remember, to make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be

switched on and in a service area with adequate signal strength.

Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile device

networks or when certain network services and/or mobile device

features are in use. Check with local service providers.

To make an emergency call:

1. If the mobile device is not on, switch it on.

2. From the Home screen, tap .

3. Key in the emergency number for your present location (for

example, 911 or other official emergency number). Emergency

numbers vary by location.

4. Tap .

Health and Safety Information 421

If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you may

first need to deactivate those features before you can make an

emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your local cellular

service provider. When making an emergency call, remember to give

all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Remember

that your mobile device may be the only means of communication at

the scene of an accident; do not cut off the call until given

permission to do so.

Care and Maintenance

Your mobile device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship

and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you

fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for

many years:

Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:

Liquids of any kind

Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and liquids

contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If the mobile

device does get wet, do not accelerate drying with the use of an

oven, microwave, or dryer, because this may damage the mobile

device and could cause a fire or explosion.

Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so may

cause an electric shock to you or damage to the mobile device.

Extreme heat or cold

Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C / 113°F.

Microwaves

Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven. Doing

so may cause a fire or explosion.

422

Dust and dirt

Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.

Cleaning solutions

Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong

detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft cloth

slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution.

Shock or vibration

Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough handling

can break internal circuit boards.

Paint

Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the device’s

moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper

operation.

Responsible Listening

Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss

Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud sounds

over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is played

louder and for longer durations. Prolonged exposure to loud sounds

(including music) is the most common cause of preventable hearing

loss. Some scientific research suggests that using portable audio

devices, such as portable music players and cell phones, at high

volume settings for long durations may lead to permanent

noise-induced hearing loss.

This includes the use of headphones (including headsets, earbuds,

and Bluetooth® or other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud

sound has also been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a

Health and Safety Information 423

ringing in the ear), hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing.

Individual susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential

hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound produced

by a portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the

sound, the device settings, and the headphones that are used. As a

result, there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for

everyone or for every combination of sound, settings, and

equipment.

You should follow some common sense recommendations when

using any portable audio device:

•

Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an audio

source.

•

Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at

which you can hear adequately.

•

Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time, not

realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing.

•

When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the

people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear what

you are listening to.

•

Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you choose

to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment, use

noise-cancelling headphones to block out background environmental

noise. By blocking background environment noise, noise cancelling

headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than

when using earbuds.

•

Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less time is

required before you hearing could be affected.

424

•

Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, such as

rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. Temporary

hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal.

•

Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you experience

ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or experience any temporary

hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio device, discontinue

use and consult your doctor.

You can obtain additional information on this subject from the

following sources:

American Academy of Audiology

11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300

Reston, VA 20190

Voice: (800) 222-2336

Email: info@audiology.org

Internet:

http://www.audiology.org/Pages/

default.aspx

National Institute on Deafness and Other

Communication Disorders

National Institutes of Health

31 Center Drive, MSC 2320

Bethesda, MD 20892-2320

Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov

Internet:

http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/

Health and Safety Information 425

Operating Environment

Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area, and

always switch your mobile device off whenever it is forbidden to use

it, or when it may cause interference or danger. When connecting the

mobile device or any accessory to another device, read its user's

guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible

products.

Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices

Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio Frequency

(RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipment may not be

shielded against the RF signals from your wireless mobile device.

Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives.

National Institute for Occupational Safety

and Health (NIOSH)

395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200

Patriots Plaza Building

Washington, DC 20201

Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH

(1-800-356-4674)

1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)

Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328

Email: cdcinfo@cdc.gov

Internet:

http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/

default.html

1-888-232-6348 TTY

426

Implantable Medical Devices

A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained

between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable

medical device, such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter

defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the device.

Persons who have such devices:

•

Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches from their

implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON;

•

Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;

•

Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to minimize

the potential for interference;

•

Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason to

suspect that interference is taking place;

•

Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your

implantable medical device. If you have any questions about using your

wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device, consult your

health care provider.

For more information see:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html#

Other Medical Devices

If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the

manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded

from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in

obtaining this information. Switch your mobile device off in health

care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct

you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using

equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy.

Health and Safety Information 427

Vehicles

RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded

electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer

or its representative regarding your vehicle before using your mobile

device in a motor vehicle. You should also consult the manufacturer

of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle.

Posted Facilities

Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices

require you to do so.

Potentially Explosive Environments

Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially

explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in

such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury

or even death. Users are advised to switch the mobile device off

while at a refueling point (service station).

Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of

radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas),

chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas

with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always,

clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer

or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as

propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals or

particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any other area

where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine.

428

When your Device is Wet

Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is already on,

turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if the device will not

turn off or you cannot remove the battery, leave it as-is). Then, dry

the device with a towel and take it to a service center.

FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)

Regulations for Wireless Devices

The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established

requirements for digital wireless mobile devices to be compatible

with hearing aids and other assistive hearing devices.

When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices (hearing

aids and cochlear implants) use wireless mobile devices, they may

detect a buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some hearing devices

are more immune than others to this interference noise, and mobile

devices also vary in the amount of interference they generate.

The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating system for

wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device users find mobile

devices that may be compatible with their hearing devices. Not all

mobile devices have been rated. Mobile devices that are rated have

the rating on their box or a label located on the box.

The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending on the

user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing device

happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not be able to use

a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out the mobile device with

your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal

needs.

Health and Safety Information 429

M-Ratings

: Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC

requirements and are likely to generate less interference to hearing

devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. M4 is the better/

higher of the two ratings. M-ratings refer to enabling acoustic

coupling with hearing aids that do not operate in telecoil mode.

T-Ratings

: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements and

are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than

mobile devices that are not labeled. T4 is the better/higher of the two

ratings. T-ratings refer to enabling inductive coupling with hearing

aids operating in telecoil mode.

Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing aid manufacturer or

hearing health professional may help you find this rating. Higher

ratings mean that the hearing device is relatively immune to

interference noise.

Under the current industry standard, American National Standards

Institute (ANSI) C63.19, the hearing aid and wireless mobile device

rating values are added together to indicate how usable they are

together. For example, if a hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and

the wireless mobile device meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the

two values equals M5.

Under the standard, this should provide the hearing aid user with

normal use while using the hearing aid with the particular wireless

mobile device. A sum of 6 or more would indicate excellent

performance.

However, these are not guarantees that all users will be satisfied. T

ratings work similarly.

430

The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19 standard.

HAC for Newer Technologies

This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids for

some of the wireless technologies that it uses. However, there may

be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone that have

not been tested yet for use with hearing aids.

It is important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly

and in different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear implant,

to determine if you hear any interfering noise. Consult your service

provider or the manufacturer of this phone for information on hearing

aid compatibility. If you have questions about return or exchange

policies, consult your service provider or phone retailer.

M3 + M2 = 5

T3 + T2 = 5

Health and Safety Information 431

Restricting Children's Access to Your

Mobile Device

Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it

because they could hurt themselves and others, damage the mobile

device, or make calls that increase your mobile device bill.

Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of the

reach of small children.

FCC Notice and Cautions

FCC Notice

The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in

close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can require you to

stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be

eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane

or butane) must comply with the National Fire Protection Standard

(NFPA-58). For a copy of this standard, contact the National Fire

Protection Association.

Cautions

Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly

approved in this document could void your warranty for this

equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment. Only

use approved batteries, antennas, and chargers. The use of any

unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile

device warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the

mobile device.

Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of

equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting, bending, or

sitting on it.

432

Other Important Safety Information

•

Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or install the

mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous

and may invalidate any warranty applicable to the device.

•

Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your

vehicle are securely mounted.

•

Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your vehicle

is mounted and operating properly.

•

When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can build up

in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical shock. To minimize

the risk of electrostatic discharge from the headset avoid using the

headset in extremely dry environments or touch a grounded unpainted

metal object to discharge static electricity before inserting the headset.

•

Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in

the same compartment as the mobile device, its parts, or accessories.

•

For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag inflates

with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable

wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in the air bag

deployment area. If wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air

bag inflates, serious injury could result.

•

Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use of

wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to the

aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate authorities before using any

function of a mobile device while on an aircraft.

•

Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or denial

of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or both.

Health and Safety Information 433

•

While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do not hold

the screen too close to your eyes.

•

Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing lights

while watching videos or playing games for extended periods. If you feel

any discomfort, stop using the device immediately.

•

Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively perform

actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a touch screen with

your fingers, or playing games, you may experience occasional discomfort

in your hands, neck, shoulders, or other parts of your body. When using

your device for extended periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip,

press the keys lightly, and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have

discomfort during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.

•

If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or light close

to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]

End User License Agreement for Software

IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License Agreement

("EULA") is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a

single entity) and Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung") for

software, owned by Samsung and its affiliated companies and its

third party suppliers and licensors, that accompanies this EULA,

which includes computer software and may include associated

media, printed materials, "online" or electronic documentation in

connection with your use of this device ("Software").

This device requires the use of preloaded software in its normal

operation. BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED SOFTWARE,

YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT

THESE TERMS, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE.

434

GRANT OF LICENSE

. Samsung grants you the following rights

provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA:

You may install, use, access, display and run one copy of the

Software on the local hard disk(s) or other permanent storage media

of one computer and use the Software on a single computer or a

mobile device at a time, and you may not make the Software

available over a network where it could be used by multiple

computers at the same time. You may make one copy of the

Software in machine readable form for backup purposes only;

provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or other

proprietary notices contained on the original.

Certain items of the Software may be subject to open source

licenses. The open source license provisions may override some of

the terms of this EULA. We make the applicable open source

licenses available to you on the Legal Notices section of the Settings

menu of your device.

RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP

. Samsung reserves all

rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. The Software is

protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and

treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the title, copyright and other

intellectual property rights in the Software. The Software is licensed,

not sold.

LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS

. You may not reverse engineer,

decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to discover the source

code or algorithms of, the Software (except and only to the extent

that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law not

withstanding this limitation), or modify, or disable any features of,

Health and Safety Information 435

the Software, or create derivative works based on the Software. You

may not rent, lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting

services with the Software.

CONSENT TO USE OF DATA

. You agree that Samsung and its

affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as part

of the product support services related to the Software provided to

you, if any, such as IMEI (your device’s unique identification number),

device number, model name, customer code, access recording, your

device’s current SW version, MCC (Mobile Country Code), MNC

(Mobile Network Code). Samsung and its affiliates may use this

information solely to improve their products or to provide customized

services or technologies to you and will not disclose this information

in a form that personally identifies you. At all times your information

will be treated in accordance with Samsung’s Privacy Policy, which

can be viewed at:

http://account.samsung.com/membership/pp

SOFTWARE UPDATES

. Samsung may provide to you or make

available to you updates, upgrades, supplements and add-on

components (if any) of the Software, including bug fixes, service

upgrades (parts or whole), products or devices, and updates and

enhancements to any software previously installed (including entirely

new versions), (collectively “Update”) after the date you obtain your

initial copy of the Software to improve the Software and ultimately

enhance your user experience with your device. This EULA applies to

all and any component of the Update that Samsung may provide to

you or make available to you after the date you obtain your initial

copy of the Software, unless we provide other terms along with such

Update. To use Software provided through Update, you must first be

licensed for the Software identified by Samsung as eligible for the

436

Update. After the Update, you may no longer use the Software that

formed the basis for your Update eligibility. The updated Software

version may add new functions and, in some limited cases, may

delete existing functions.

While the Update will be generally available, in some limited

circumstances, the Software updates will only be offered by your

network carrier, and such Software updates will be governed by your

contractual relationship with your network carrier.

With the “Automatic Update” function enabled (as in the default

setting in the System Update menu in the Setting), your device

downloads some Updates automatically from time to time. Your

device will, however, ask for your consent before installing any

Update If you choose to disable the “Automatic Update” function,

then you can check the availability of new Updates by clicking on the

“Check Update” menu in the Setting. We recommend that you check

availability of any new Updates periodically for optimal use of your

device. If you want to avoid any use of network data for the Update

downloads, then you should choose the “Wi-Fi Only” option in the

Setting. (Regardless of the option you choose, the “Automatic

Update” function downloads Updates only through Wi-Fi connection.)

6. Some features of the Software may require your device to have

access to the internet and may be subject to restrictions imposed by

your network or internet provider. Unless your device is connected to

the internet through Wi-Fi connection, the Software will access

through your mobile network, which may result in additional charges

depending on your payment plan. In addition, your enjoyment of

some features of the Software may be affected by the suitability and

performance of your device hardware or data access.

Health and Safety Information 437

SOFTWARE TRANSFER

. You may not transfer this EULA or the rights

to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it is in

connection with the sale of the mobile device which the Software

accompanied. In such event, the transfer must include all of the

Software (including all component parts, the media and printed

materials, any upgrades, this EULA) and you may not retain any

copies of the Software. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer,

such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving

the Software must agree to all the EULA terms.

EXPORT RESTRICTIONS

. You acknowledge that the Software is

subject to export restrictions of various countries. You agree to

comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply

to the Software, including all the applicable export restriction laws

and regulations.

TERMINATION

. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your rights

under this License will terminate automatically without notice from

Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of

this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA, you must cease all use of

the Software and destroy all copies, full or partial, of the Software.

10.

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY

. UNLESS SEPARATELY STATED IN A

WRITTEN EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY ACCOMPANYING YOUR

DEVICE, ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY SAMSUNG WITH THIS MOBILE

DEVICE (WHETHER INCLUDED WITH THE DEVICE, DOWNLOADED, OR

OTHERWISE OBTAINED) IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN "AS

AVAILABLE" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM

SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT

POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW, SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS

ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,

438

SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY,

LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON INFRINGEMENT OF

THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SOME

JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS

MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER

ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG OR ITS

AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER BY

SAMSUNG OF WARRANTY REGARDING THE SOFTWARE, OR TO

CREATE ANY WARRANTY OF ANY SORT FROM SAMSUNG.

11.

THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS

. Certain third party applications may

be included with, or downloaded to this mobile device. Samsung

makes no representations whatsoever about any of these

applications. Since Samsung has no control over such applications,

you acknowledge and agree that Samsung is not responsible for the

availability of such applications and is not responsible or liable for

any content, advertising, products, services, or other materials on or

available from such applications. You expressly acknowledge and

agree that use of third party applications is at your sole risk and that

the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality, performance, accuracy and

effort is with you. It is up to you to take precautions to ensure that

whatever you select to use is free of such items as viruses, worms,

Trojan horses, and other items of a destructive nature. References on

this mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of any

third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to you, and do not

constitute or imply an endorsement, sponsorship, or

recommendation of, or affiliation with the third party or its products

and services. You agree that Samsung shall not be responsible or

Health and Safety Information 439

liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage or loss, including but not

limited to any damage to the mobile device or loss of data, caused or

alleged to be caused by, or in connection with, use of or reliance on

any such third party content, products, or services available on or

through any such application. You acknowledge and agree that the

use of any third-party application is governed by such third party

application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement, Privacy

Policy, or other such agreement and that any information or personal

data you provide, whether knowingly or unknowingly, to such

third-party application provider, will be subject to such third party

application provider's privacy policy, if such a policy exists.

SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE

OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY

APPLICATION PROVIDER. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY

WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION

IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE

USE TO WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY

SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.

12.

SAMSUNG APPLICATIONS

. Certain Samsung applications and

services may be included with, or downloaded to, this mobile device.

Many of them require Samsung Services membership registration

(“Samsung Account”), and your rights and obligations will be set

forth in separate Samsung Account terms and conditions and privacy

policies. There are non-Samsung Account applications and services

that require your consent to their separate terms and conditions and

privacy policies. You expressly acknowledge and agree that your use

of such applications and services will be subject to the applicable

terms and conditions and privacy policies.

440

13.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR

ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE

USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD

PARTY APPLICATION, ITS CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING

BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO

ERRORS, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN

OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE TO

CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, IN-APP PURCHASES, AND ALL

OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED

OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO

NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR

LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NOTWITHSTANDING THE

FOREGOING, SAMSUNG ELECTRONIC CO.'S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU

FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING BUT

NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR

OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR

THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY

OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT

PURCHASER PAID SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY

SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS

MOBILE DEVICE. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND

DISCLAIMERS (INCLUDING SECTIONS 10, 11, 12 AND 13) SHALL

APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,

EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

14.

U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS

. The Software

is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as "commercial items"

consisting of "commercial software" and "commercial software

Health and Safety Information 441

documentation" with only those rights as are granted to all other end

users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. All Products are

provided only with "restricted rights" with only those rights as are

granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions

herein. All Software and Products are provided subject to Federal

Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 52.227.19.

15.

APPLICABLE LAW

. This EULA is governed by the laws of the

jurisdiction where you are a resident or, if a resident of the United

States, by the laws of the state of Texas, without regard to its conflict

of law provisions. This EULA shall not be governed by the UN

Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the

application of which is expressly excluded.

16.

DISPUTE RESOLUTION

(a) Non-United States residents. If a dispute, controversy or

difference arising in any way from this EULA or your use of the

Software is not amicably settled, it shall be subject to the non-

exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the jurisdiction where you are a

resident. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Samsung may apply for

injunctive remedies (or an equivalent type of urgent legal relief) in

any jurisdiction.

(b) United States residents. ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING

IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE

SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING

ARBITRATION, AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute

shall not be combined or consolidated with any other person’s or

entity’s claim or dispute, and specifically, without limitation of the

foregoing, shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a

class action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single

arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount, the

442

relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall be

conducted according to the American Arbitration Association (AAA)

Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer disputes. This

arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration

Act. The laws of the State of Texas, without reference to its choice of

laws principles, shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all

disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The arbitrator

shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this

arbitration provision and the EULA. For any arbitration in which your

total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness

fees, are $5,000.00 or less ("Small Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you

prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees

and costs as part of any award, but may not grant Samsung its

attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined

that the claim was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case, you

shall be required to pay no more than half of the total administrative,

facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less,

and Samsung shall pay the remainder of such fees. Administrative,

facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage

claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, exceed

$5,000.00 ("Large Claim") shall be determined according to AAA

rules. In a Large Claim case, the arbitrator may grant to the

prevailing party, or apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney

fees, expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on

the arbitrator's award in any court of competent jurisdiction. This

arbitration provision also applies to claims against Samsung’s

employees, representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises

from the licensing or use of the Software. You may opt out of this

dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to Samsung no later

Health and Safety Information 443

than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer

purchaser’s purchase of this device. To opt out, you must send notice

by e-mail to optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line:

"Arbitration Opt Out." You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your

name and address; (b) the date on which the device was purchased;

MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI or MEID

or Serial Number can be found (i) on the device box; (ii) on the device

information screen, which can be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a

label on the back of the device beneath the battery, if the battery is

removable; and (iv) on the outside of the device if the battery is not

removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling

1-888-987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the

first consumer purchaser's purchase of the device and providing the

same information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be

effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out of

this dispute resolution procedure will not affect your use of the

device or its preloaded Software, and you will continue to enjoy the

benefits of this license.

17.

ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY

. This EULA is the entire

agreement between you and Samsung relating to the Software and

supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written

communications, proposals and representations with respect to the

Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA. If any

provision of this EULA is held to be void, invalid, unenforceable or

illegal, the other provisions shall continue in full force and effect.

[050113]

444

Index

Numerics

2 Sec Pause

Adding 84

ABC 107

Accessing

Recently-used

applications 70

Voicemail 27

Accessory 389

Audio Output 389

Dock Sound 389

Screen Display 389

Accounts and Sync

Adding Contacts 141

Add 2 Sec Pause 87, 129

Add to Favorites 149

Adjusting

Call volume 93

Airplane Mode 330

Alarm

Deleting an Existing Alarm

256

Setting 254

Turning Off 256

Alerts

Presidential 163

Alerts on Call 338

Allowing Mock Locations 395

AllShare Cast

Activation 336

On 245, 336

AllShare Cast Hub 44

1st Time Pairing 245

Activation on Device 245

Connecting 243

Disconnecting Your Device

246

Dongle 245

NFC Connection 333

Pairing 245

Pairing Your Devices 245

Re-pairing a Device 246

Set Up Hardware 243

AllShare Play

Group Play 204

see Samsung Link 239,

285

AllShareCast Hub 286

AMBER Alerts

Disable 164

445

AMBER alerts 163

Answering a call 84

Answering Key 338

Application cache and data

Clearing 281

Application Menus

Navigating through 68

Applications 54

Calculator 249

Camera 253

Email 258

Google Mail 259

Google Maps 264

Hide 55

Internet 262

messaging 268

My Account Downloader

269

Sharing with Others 73

Show Hidden 55

Shutting Down 29

Storage Used 360

Using the Camcorder 209

Using the Camera 186

Video Player 287

Voice Recorder 288

YouTube 290

Applications and

Development 248

Applications settings

allow mock locations 394

Apps

Adding 53

Apps Screen

Customizing 54

Audio

Output Mode 389

Auto Reject

Configuration 86

Auto Reject List 337

Auto Reject Mode 337

Auto Share Shot 193

Auto Sync App Data 130

Automatic Answering 338

Automatic Restore 383

Back up

My Account 383

My Data 383

Backup and Restore 383

Battery

Charging 15

Display Percentage 17,

352

Extending Life 18

Installing 14

Low Battery Indicator 17

Removal 14

446

Wall Charger 15

Battery Cover

Removal 11

Replace 11

Battery Life

Extending 18

Battery Usage 357

Battery Use & Safety 413

Bigger Font

Setting 392

Bing

Set Search Engine 305

Bluetooth 327

About 307

Change Name 308

Configure Device Settings

311

Deleting a Paired Device

312

Device Name 328

Disconnecting a Paired

Device 312

Media Audio 311

Microhone Function 311

Off 307, 327

On 307, 327

Outgoing Headset

Condition 338, 342

Paring Devices 310

Review Downloaded Files

309

Scan for Devices 309

Scanning for other Devices

328

Sending Contact

Information 313

Sending Contacts Via 313

Sending Namecard 138

Set Visibility 308

Settings 308

Status indicators 307

Switching to Headset

during call 95

Turning on and off 307,

327

Visibility 328

Visible Time-Out 309

Browser

Adding bookmarks 300

Deleting bookmarks 301

Easier to Read Pages 304

Emptying cookies 301

Entering a URL 295

Inverted Display 304

Navigation 293

Options 294

Quick Controls 306

Search Engine 305

447

Settings 303

Bubble

Options 159

Buddy Photo Share 189

Burst Shot 190

Calculator

Scientific Functions 249

Calendar

Creating an event 251

Settings 251

Sync 251

Calibrate Screen 60

Calibration 388

Call

Settings 84, 85

Call Alert 337

Call Vibrations 337

Call Answering/Ending 338

Call Functions 79

Answering 84

Background Calling 81

Ending 81

Ending a Call 81

Ending via Status Bar 81

Making a Multi-Party Call

Pause Dialing 87

Redialing the last number

Wait dialing 88

Call Functons

Vibrate 339

Call Restriction 85, 337

Call Settings 337

Additional Settings 343

General 337

Call Sound

Setting 97

Call Status Tones 337

Call Vibrations 337

Call Volume

Adjusting 93

Extra Volume 93, 339

Call Waiting 98

Calls

Auto Reject 337

Making a 79

Multi-party 97

Muting 95

Camcorder 209

Accessing the Video Folder

214

Options 210

Shooting Video 209

Camera 185

Best Photo 188

448

Burst Shot 190

Camera Options 188

Default Storage Location

193

Enabling Share Shot 198

Lock Screen Shortcut 368

Name Tag 194

Taking Pictures 186

Camercorder

Taking Pictures During

Video 213

Care and Maintenance 421

Charging battery 15

ChatON

Buddy photo share 196,

205

Children and Cell Phones 406

Chrome

Google 253

Clearing

Application cache and

data 281

Clock 368

CMAS 163, 164

Commercial Mobile Alerting

System (CMAS) 411

Configuration

Initial 19

Connections

Accessing the Internet

293

Contact

Copying to microSD Card

138

Creating a New 120

Joining 133

New From Keypad 123

Photo 207

Contact Entry

Options 132

Contact List

Options 130

Contact Menus

Options 131

Contacts

Adding a Number to

Existing 128

Adding a Pause or Wait

129

Adding Your Facebook

Friends 142

Additional Options 144

Deleting 129

Display Options 140, 145

Displaying Contacts by

Name 145

449

Export List to microSD

316, 384

First Name 145

Groups 146

Last Name First 145

Merge with Google 130

Merge with Samsung

Account 130

Sending All 137

Settings 145

Share Namecard Via 132

Sharing Settings 145

Sharing/Sending 136

Contacts List 79

Context Menus 127, 131

Navigation 70

Using 70

Contextual Awareness 351

Emptying 301

CPU Usage

Display 394

Create Folder

Group Apps 54

Creating a Playlist 235

Creating and sending

Messages 151

Customizing

Home screens 71

Data

Auto Sync Data 330

Restrict Background Data

330

Data Limit

Setting 329

Data Usage

Cycle 329

Limiting 329

Date

Selecting Format 390

Date and Time 390

Default Notifications

Settings 349

Default Storage

Assigning 185

Camcorder 24, 185, 213

Camera 24, 185

Camera Storage 193

Deleting

Multiple Messages 160

Single Bubble 160

Single Message 160

Deleting a contact 129

Deregister

Web Storage 241

Desk Clock 254

Configuring 258

450

Desktop Backup Password

396

Device

Calibration 60

Reset 384

Device Options

Screen 347

Display

Icons 40

Settings 39

Status Bar 39

Using Negative Colors 392

Display / Touch-Screen 417

Displaying your phone

number 79

DivX

Locating VOD Number 219

Overview 219

Registering Your DivX

Device 220

Registration Code 398

Do cell phones pose a health

hazard? 400

Dock

Sound 389

Dongle

AllShare Cast Hub 245

Downloading

New application 278

Downloads 258

Internet Downloads 258

Other Downloads 258

Draft Messages 153

Dropbox 240

DTMF Tones 339, 345

Edit Page 72

Email 166

Changing Signature 170,

176

Composing 169

Configuring Settings 170

Creating an Internet

Account 167

Internet Email 167

Opening 168

Refreshing Messages 168

Sending 144

Wi-Fi Download of

Attachments 171, 177

Emergency

Alert Preview 163

Alerts 163

Tone 350

Emergency Alerts

AMBER 163

Configuration 164

Imminent Extreme 163

451

Message Settings 163

Severe 163

Emergency Calls 420

Making 82

With SIM 82

Without SIM 82

Emoticons 154

Ending

A call 81

Entering Text 104

Using SWYPE 105

Erasing files from

Memory card 356

Exchange Email 172

Account Setup 172

Composing 175

Configuring Settings 176

Deleting Message 176

Opening 175

Refreshing Messages 175

Exposure to Radio Frequency

(RF) Signals 400

Extra Volume 343

Extreme Alert

Disable 164

Face Unlock 363

Facebook

Personalize 379

Predictive Text 379

Swpe Connect 375

Facial Recognition 363

Factory Data Reset 384

Prior To 384

Favorites Tab 149

FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility

(HAC) Regulations for

Wireless Devices 428

FCC Notice and Cautions 431

Folder

Create 53

Font

Size 352

Style 352

Font Size

Caption 290

Changing 392

Minimum Setting 304

Forgot Pattern? 366

Gallery

Folder Options 203

Opening 216

Picture-In-Picture 218

Games

Volume 348

Gestures

Browse Image 58

452

Overview 58

Screen Capture 59

Sensitivity Settings 59,

388

Shake to Update 59

Tilt to Zoom 58

Getting Started 8

Battery 13

Battery Cover 10

Locking/Unlocking the

Device 22

microSD card 12

Switching Device On/Off

Voicemail 26

Gmail 179, 259

Composing a Message

180

Creating an Additional

Account 182

Opening 180

Other Options 180

Personalize 379

Personalize Swype 375

Refreshing 180

Signing In 179

Viewing 181

Google

Ads 260

Create New Account 22

Merge Contacts 130

Retrieving Password 23

Set Search Engine 305

Settings 260

Signing into Your Account

Voice Typing 104

Google Books 275

Google Mail

Samsung TracFone SCH S968C Galaxy S III (7.1 MB) TF English User Manual MG3 F5

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation